[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025048116A1 - Data transmission of station in wireless lan system - Google Patents

Data transmission of station in wireless lan system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025048116A1
WO2025048116A1 PCT/KR2024/006083 KR2024006083W WO2025048116A1 WO 2025048116 A1 WO2025048116 A1 WO 2025048116A1 KR 2024006083 W KR2024006083 W KR 2024006083W WO 2025048116 A1 WO2025048116 A1 WO 2025048116A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
sta
ppdu
txop
nav
packet
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/KR2024/006083
Other languages
French (fr)
Korean (ko)
Inventor
천진영
최진수
임동국
박은성
장인선
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
LG Electronics Inc
Original Assignee
LG Electronics Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by LG Electronics Inc filed Critical LG Electronics Inc
Publication of WO2025048116A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025048116A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/50Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00Wireless channel access
    • H04W74/08Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00Wireless channel access
    • H04W74/08Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA
    • H04W74/0808Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA using carrier sensing, e.g. carrier sense multiple access [CSMA]
    • H04W74/0816Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA using carrier sensing, e.g. carrier sense multiple access [CSMA] with collision avoidance
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W84/00Network topologies
    • H04W84/02Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
    • H04W84/10Small scale networks; Flat hierarchical networks
    • H04W84/12WLAN [Wireless Local Area Networks]

Definitions

  • the present specification relates to a wireless LAN system, and more specifically, to a method and device for a station of a wireless LAN system to transmit data within a TXOP (transmission opportunity).
  • TXOP transmission opportunity
  • Wireless LAN or WLAN has been improved in various ways.
  • EHT Extreme high throughput
  • PPDU PHY layer protocol data unit
  • HARQ Hybrid automatic repeat request
  • the EHT standard can be called the IEEE 802.11be standard.
  • the EHT specification supports high throughput and high data rates, which may include wide bandwidth (e.g., 160/320 MHz), 16 streams, and/or multi-link (or multi-band) operation.
  • wide bandwidth e.g. 160/320 MHz
  • 16 streams e.g., 16 streams
  • multi-link or multi-band
  • wide bandwidth e.g., 160/240/320MHz
  • preamble puncturing and multiple RU transmission can be used to efficiently use bandwidth.
  • WLAN systems can be further improved through the UHR (Ultra High Reliability) standard.
  • the UHR system can be called the IEEE 802.11bn standard.
  • the UHR system aims to support ultra-high reliability when transmitting signals to STAs.
  • various technologies are being considered for the UHR system, such as high throughput, low latency, and extended range support.
  • communication can be initiated from an STA (station) that has acquired a TXOP. That is, in a conventional WLAN system, a TXOP holder/responder defined in a conventional standard can transmit data until the TXOP ends, and data transmission by other STAs is restricted.
  • the TXOP holder/responder defined in the conventional standard can transmit data until the TXOP ends, and data transmission by other STAs is restricted.
  • data/packets/signals must be transmitted quickly before the TXOP ends.
  • the technical features of conventional TXOPs are used, the problem of increased data latency may occur.
  • This specification improves the operation of conventional TXOP and/or NAV (network allocation vector). This can solve the technical problem of not being able to transmit low latency data during the existing configured TXOP.
  • the technical features of the present specification may relate to a method performed in a specific STA.
  • an example of the present specification may relate to a method performed in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) system.
  • a station STA may set a network allocation vector (NAV) based on an intra BSS (basic service set) PPDU (Physical Protocol Data Unit).
  • NAV Network allocation vector
  • PPDU Physical Protocol Data Unit
  • the STA may determine whether to consider the NAV. For example, if the STA is neither the TXOP holder nor the TXOP responder and the packet to be transmitted is related to a low latency packet, the STA may not consider the NAV.
  • the technical features described in this specification can bring about various advantageous effects.
  • the TXOP holder/responder can transmit data within the TXOP, and data transmission by other STAs is restricted.
  • data/packets/signals must be transmitted quickly before the TXOP ends. Even in such cases, if the technical features related to the conventional TXOP are used, the problem of increased data latency may occur.
  • This specification improves the operation of conventional TXOP and/or NAV. This can solve the technical problem of not being able to transmit data satisfying specific requirements during a previously set TXOP. For example, if it is possible to transmit data even during a TXOP through this specification, unnecessary delay in the transmission of low-latency data can be prevented.
  • Figure 1 illustrates an example of a transmitter and/or receiver device of the present specification.
  • FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram showing the structure of a wireless local area network (WLAN).
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • Figure 3 is a diagram illustrating a general link setup process.
  • Figure 5 describes a PPDU transmitted/received by an STA of this specification.
  • Figure 6 is a diagram showing the layout of resource units (RUs) used for 20MHz PPDU.
  • Figure 7 is a diagram showing the layout of resource units (RUs) used for 40MHz PPDU.
  • Figure 8 is a diagram showing the layout of resource units (RUs) used for 80MHz PPDU.
  • Figure 9 shows the operation according to UL-MU.
  • Figure 10 shows an example of channels used/supported/defined within the 2.4 GHz band.
  • Figure 11 illustrates an example of channels used/supported/defined within the 5 GHz band.
  • Figure 12 illustrates an example of channels used/supported/defined within the 6 GHz band.
  • Figure 13 shows an example of a MAC frame header.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a modified example of a transmitter and/or receiver of the present specification.
  • Figure 15 relates to operations performed in the device proposed in this specification.
  • Fig. 16 relates to another operation performed in the device proposed in the present specification.
  • Figure 17 is an example of a procedure flow diagram of this specification.
  • a or B can mean “only A,” “only B,” or “both A and B.” In other words, as used herein, “A or B” can be interpreted as “A and/or B.” For example, as used herein, “A, B or C” can mean “only A,” “only B,” “only C,” or “any combination of A, B and C.”
  • a slash (/) or a comma can mean “and/or.”
  • A/B can mean “A and/or B.”
  • A/B can mean “only A,” “only B,” or “both A and B.”
  • A, B, C can mean “A, B, or C.”
  • At least one of A and B can mean “only A”, “only B” or “both A and B”. Additionally, as used herein, the expressions “at least one of A or B” or “at least one of A and/or B” can be interpreted identically to “at least one of A and B”.
  • control information UHR-Signal field
  • UHR-Signal field may be proposed as an example of the “control information”.
  • control information in this specification is not limited to the “UHR -Signal field”, and the “UHR -Signal field” may be proposed as an example of the “control information”.
  • control information UHR-Signal field
  • UHR-Signal field may be proposed as an example of the “control information”.
  • a/an can mean “at least one” or “one or more.” Additionally, a term ending with “(s)” can mean “at least one” or “one or more.”
  • the following examples of this specification can be applied to various wireless communication systems.
  • the following examples of this specification can be applied to a wireless local area network (WLAN) system.
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • the present specification can be applied to the standards of IEEE 802.11a/g/n/ac/ax/be/bn.
  • the examples of this specification can be applied to the UHR (Ultra High Reliability) standard or the next-generation wireless LAN standard that enhances IEEE 802.11bn.
  • the examples of this specification can be applied to a mobile communication system.
  • the examples of this specification can be applied to a mobile communication system based on the LTE (Long Term Evolution) and its evolution based on the 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) standard.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project
  • Figure 1 illustrates an example of a transmitter and/or receiver device of the present specification.
  • FIG. 1 relates to at least one STA (station).
  • the STA (110, 120) of the present specification may also be called by various names such as a mobile terminal, a wireless device, a Wireless Transmit/Receive Unit (WTRU), a User Equipment (UE), a Mobile Station (MS), a Mobile Subscriber Unit, or simply a user.
  • the STA (110, 120) of the present specification may also be called by various names such as a network, a base station, a Node-B, an Access Point (AP), a repeater, a router, and a relay.
  • the STA (110, 120) of the present specification may also be called by various names such as a receiving apparatus, a transmitting apparatus, a receiving STA, a transmitting STA, a receiving device, and a transmitting device.
  • STA (110, 120) may perform an AP (access point) role or a non-AP role. That is, STA (110, 120) of this specification may perform functions of AP and/or non-AP. In this specification, AP may also be indicated as AP STA.
  • the STA (110, 120) of this specification can support various communication standards other than the IEEE 802.11 standard. For example, it can support communication standards according to the 3GPP standard (e.g., LTE, LTE-A, 5G NR standard).
  • the STA of this specification can be implemented as various devices such as a mobile phone, a vehicle, a personal computer, etc.
  • the STA of this specification can support communication for various communication services such as voice call, video call, data communication, and autonomous driving (Self-Driving, Autonomous-Driving).
  • STA 110, 120
  • STA may include a medium access control (MAC) and a physical layer interface for a wireless medium that follows the regulations of the IEEE 802.11 standard.
  • MAC medium access control
  • the first STA (110) may include a processor (111), a memory (112), and a transceiver (113).
  • the illustrated processor, memory, and transceiver may each be implemented as separate chips, or at least two blocks/functions may be implemented through one chip.
  • the transceiver (113) of the first STA performs signal transmission and reception operations. Specifically, it can transmit and receive IEEE 802.11 packets (e.g., IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax/be, etc.).
  • IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax/be, etc. e.g., IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax/be, etc.
  • the first STA (110) can perform the intended operation of the AP.
  • the processor (111) of the AP can receive a signal through the transceiver (113), process the received signal, generate a transmission signal, and perform control for signal transmission.
  • the memory (112) of the AP can store a signal received through the transceiver (113) (i.e., a reception signal) and store a signal to be transmitted through the transceiver (i.e., a transmission signal).
  • the second STA (120) can perform the intended operation of the Non-AP STA.
  • the transceiver (123) of the non-AP performs a signal transmission and reception operation. Specifically, it can transmit and receive IEEE 802.11 packets (e.g., IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax/be, etc.).
  • the processor (121) of the Non-AP STA can receive a signal through the transceiver (123), process the received signal, generate a transmission signal, and perform control for signal transmission.
  • the memory (122) of the Non-AP STA can store a signal received through the transceiver (123) (i.e., a reception signal) and store a signal to be transmitted through the transceiver (i.e., a transmission signal).
  • the operation of a device indicated as AP may be performed in the first STA (110) or the second STA (120).
  • the operation of the device indicated as AP may be controlled by the processor (111) of the first STA (110), and a related signal may be transmitted or received through a transceiver (113) controlled by the processor (111) of the first STA (110).
  • control information related to the operation of the AP or a transmission/reception signal of the AP may be stored in the memory (112) of the first STA (110).
  • the operation of the device indicated as an AP is controlled by the processor (121) of the second STA (120), and a related signal may be transmitted or received through a transceiver (123) controlled by the processor (121) of the second STA (120).
  • control information related to the operation of the AP or a transmission/reception signal of the AP may be stored in the memory (122) of the second STA (110).
  • the operation of a device indicated as a non-AP may be performed in the first STA (110) or the second STA (120).
  • the operation of the device indicated as a non-AP may be controlled by the processor (121) of the second STA (120), and a related signal may be transmitted or received through the transceiver (123) controlled by the processor (121) of the second STA (120).
  • control information related to the operation of the non-AP or the transmission/reception signal of the AP may be stored in the memory (122) of the second STA (120).
  • the operation of a device indicated as a non-AP is controlled by the processor (111) of the first STA (110), and a related signal may be transmitted or received through a transceiver (113) controlled by the processor (111) of the first STA (120).
  • control information related to the operation of the non-AP or the transmission/reception signal of the AP may be stored in the memory (112) of the first STA (110).
  • devices called (transmitting/receiving) STA, first STA, second STA, STA1, STA2, AP, first AP, second AP, AP1, AP2, (transmitting/receiving) Terminal, (transmitting/receiving) device, (transmitting/receiving) apparatus, network, etc. may refer to the STA (110, 120) of FIG. 1.
  • devices indicated as (transmitting/receiving) STA, first STA, second STA, STA1, STA2, AP, first AP, second AP, AP1, AP2, (transmitting/receiving) Terminal, (transmitting/receiving) device, (transmitting/receiving) apparatus, network, etc. without specific drawing symbols may also refer to the STA (110, 120) of FIG. 1.
  • the operation of various STAs transmitting and receiving signals (e.g., PPPDUs) may be performed by the transceiver (113, 123) of Fig. 1.
  • an example of an operation for generating a transmit/receive signal or performing data processing or calculation in advance for a transmit/receive signal may include: 1) an operation for determining/acquiring/configuring/computing/decoding/encoding bit information of a subfield (SIG, STF, LTF, Data) field included in a PPDU, 2) an operation for determining/configuring/acquiring time resources or frequency resources (e.g., subcarrier resources) used for a subfield (SIG, STF, LTF, Data) field included in a PPDU, 3) an operation for determining/configuring/acquiring specific sequences (e.g., pilot sequences, STF/LTF sequences, extra sequences applied to SIG) used for a subfield (SIG, STF, LTF, Data) field included in a PPDU, 3) an operation for determining/configuring/acquiring specific sequences (e.g., pilot sequences, STF/LTF sequences, extra sequences applied to SIG) used for a subfield
  • various information e.g., information related to fields/subfields/control fields/parameters/power, etc.
  • various information e.g., information related to fields/subfields/control fields/parameters/power, etc.
  • various STAs for determining/acquiring/configuring/computing/decoding/encoding transmission/reception signals can be stored in the memory (112, 122) of Fig. 1.
  • the device/STA of the sub-drawing (a) of the above-described Fig. 1 can be modified as in the sub-drawing (b) of Fig. 1.
  • the STA (110, 120) of the present specification will be described based on the sub-drawing (b) of Fig. 1.
  • the transceiver (113, 123) illustrated in sub-drawing (b) of FIG. 1 may perform the same function as the transceiver illustrated in sub-drawing (a) of FIG. 1 described above.
  • the processing chip (114, 124) illustrated in sub-drawing (b) of FIG. 1 may include a processor (111, 121) and a memory (112, 122).
  • the processor (111, 121) and the memory (112, 122) illustrated in sub-drawing (b) of FIG. 1 may perform the same function as the processor (111, 121) and the memory (112, 122) illustrated in sub-drawing (a) of FIG. 1 described above.
  • the mobile terminal, the wireless device, the Wireless Transmit/Receive Unit (WTRU), the User Equipment (UE), the Mobile Station (MS), the Mobile Subscriber Unit, the user, the user STA, the network, the Base Station, the Node-B, the Access Point (AP), the repeater, the router, the relay, the receiving device, the transmitting device, the receiving STA, the transmitting STA, the receiving Device, the transmitting Device, the receiving Apparatus, and/or the transmitting Apparatus described below may refer to the STA (110, 120) illustrated in the sub-drawings (a)/(b) of FIG. 1, or may refer to the processing chip (114, 124) illustrated in the sub-drawing (b) of FIG. 1.
  • the technical feature of the present specification may be performed in the STA (110, 120) illustrated in the sub-drawings (a)/(b) of FIG. 1, or may be performed only in the processing chip (114, 124) illustrated in the sub-drawings (b) of FIG. 1.
  • the technical feature that the transmitting STA transmits a control signal may be understood as a technical feature that the control signal generated in the processor (111, 121) illustrated in the sub-drawings (a)/(b) of FIG. 1 is transmitted through the transceiver (113, 123) illustrated in the sub-drawings (a)/(b) of FIG. 1.
  • the technical feature that the transmitting STA transmits a control signal may be understood as a technical feature that the control signal to be transmitted to the transceiver (113, 123) is generated in the processing chip (114, 124) illustrated in the sub-drawings (b) of FIG. 1.
  • a technical feature of a receiving STA receiving a control signal may be understood as a technical feature of a control signal being received by a transceiver (113, 123) illustrated in a sub-drawing (a) of FIG. 1.
  • a technical feature of a receiving STA receiving a control signal may be understood as a technical feature of a control signal received by a transceiver (113, 123) illustrated in a sub-drawing (a) of FIG. 1 being acquired by a processor (111, 121) illustrated in a sub-drawing (a) of FIG. 1.
  • a technical feature of a receiving STA receiving a control signal may be understood as a technical feature of a control signal received by a transceiver (113, 123) illustrated in a sub-drawing (b) of FIG. 1 being acquired by a processing chip (114, 124) illustrated in a sub-drawing (b) of FIG.
  • software code (115, 125) may be included in the memory (112, 122).
  • the software code (115, 125) may include instructions that control the operation of the processor (111, 121).
  • the software code (115, 125) may be included in various programming languages.
  • the processor (111, 121) or the processing chip (114, 124) illustrated in FIG. 1 may include an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), another chipset, a logic circuit, and/or a data processing device.
  • the processor may be an application processor (AP).
  • the processor (111, 121) or the processing chip (114, 124) illustrated in FIG. 1 may include at least one of a digital signal processor (DSP), a central processing unit (CPU), a graphics processing unit (GPU), and a modem (modulator and demodulator).
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • CPU central processing unit
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • modem modulator and demodulator
  • 1 may be a SNAPDRAGON® series processor manufactured by Qualcomm®, an EXYNOS® series processor manufactured by Samsung®, an A series processor manufactured by Apple®, a HELIO® series processor manufactured by MediaTek®, an ATOM® series processor manufactured by INTEL®, or a processor that enhances these.
  • uplink may mean a link for communication from a non-AP STA to an AP STA, and uplink PPDU/packet/signal, etc. may be transmitted through the uplink.
  • downlink may mean a link for communication from an AP STA to a non-AP STA, and downlink PPDU/packet/signal, etc. may be transmitted through the downlink.
  • FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram showing the structure of a wireless local area network (WLAN).
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • FIG. 2 shows the structure of the infrastructure BSS (basic service set) of IEEE (institute of electrical and electronic engineers) 802.11.
  • the wireless LAN system may include one or more infrastructure BSS (200, 205) (hereinafter, BSS).
  • BSS infrastructure BSS
  • the BSS (200, 205) is a set of APs and STAs, such as an access point (AP) 225 and a station (STA1, 200-1), which are successfully synchronized and can communicate with each other, and is not a concept referring to a specific area.
  • the BSS (205) may include one or more STAs (205-1, 205-2) that can be associated with one AP (230).
  • a BSS may include at least one STA, an AP (225, 230) providing a distribution service, and a distribution system (DS, 210) connecting multiple APs.
  • the distributed system (210) can implement an extended service set (ESS, 240) by connecting multiple BSSs (200, 205).
  • ESS can be used as a term to indicate a network formed by connecting one or more APs through the distributed system (210).
  • APs included in one ESS (240) can have the same SSID (service set identification).
  • the portal can act as a bridge to connect a wireless LAN network (IEEE 802.11) to another network (e.g., 802.X).
  • IEEE 802.11 IEEE 802.11
  • 802.X another network
  • a network between APs (225, 230) and a network between APs (225, 230) and STAs (200-1, 205-1, 205-2) can be implemented.
  • a network that establishes a network and performs communication between STAs without an AP (225, 230) is defined as an ad-hoc network or an independent basic service set (IBSS).
  • FIG. 2 The bottom of Figure 2 is a conceptual diagram showing IBSS.
  • IBSS is a BSS operating in ad-hoc mode. Since IBSS does not include AP, there is no centralized management entity. That is, in IBSS, STAs (250-1, 250-2, 250-3, 255-4, 255-5) are managed in a distributed manner. In IBSS, all STAs (250-1, 250-2, 250-3, 255-4, 255-5) can be mobile STAs, and access to the distributed system is not permitted, forming a self-contained network.
  • Figure 3 is a diagram illustrating a general link setup process.
  • the STA may perform a network discovery operation.
  • the network discovery operation may include a scanning operation of the STA. That is, in order for the STA to access the network, it must find a network that it can participate in.
  • the STA must identify a compatible network before participating in the wireless network, and the process of identifying networks existing in a specific area is called scanning.
  • scanning There are two types of scanning methods: active scanning and passive scanning.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates a network discovery operation including an active scanning process as an example.
  • an STA performing scanning transmits a probe request frame to search for any APs in the vicinity while moving between channels and waits for a response thereto.
  • a responder transmits a probe response frame to an STA that transmitted the probe request frame as a response to the probe request frame.
  • the responder may be an STA that last transmitted a beacon frame in a BSS of the channel being scanned.
  • an AP transmits a beacon frame, so the AP becomes the responder, and in an IBSS, STAs within an IBSS take turns transmitting beacon frames, so the responder is not constant.
  • an STA that transmits a probe request frame on channel 1 and receives a probe response frame on channel 1 can store BSS-related information included in the received probe response frame and move to the next channel (e.g., channel 2) to perform scanning (i.e., transmitting and receiving probe requests/responses on channel 2) in the same manner.
  • the next channel e.g., channel 2
  • scanning i.e., transmitting and receiving probe requests/responses on channel 2
  • the scanning operation may also be performed in a passive scanning manner.
  • An STA performing scanning based on passive scanning may wait for a beacon frame while moving between channels.
  • a beacon frame is one of the management frames in IEEE 802.11, and is periodically transmitted to notify the existence of a wireless network and to enable an STA performing scanning to find a wireless network and participate in the wireless network.
  • an AP periodically transmits a beacon frame
  • STAs in the IBSS take turns transmitting beacon frames.
  • an STA performing scanning receives a beacon frame, it stores information about the BSS included in the beacon frame and moves to another channel, recording beacon frame information in each channel.
  • An STA receiving a beacon frame may store information related to the BSS included in the received beacon frame, move to the next channel, and perform scanning on the next channel in the same manner.
  • An STA that has discovered a network may perform an authentication process through step S320.
  • This authentication process may be referred to as a first authentication process in order to clearly distinguish it from the security setup operation of step S340 described below.
  • the authentication process of S320 may include a process in which the STA transmits an authentication request frame to the AP, and in response, the AP transmits an authentication response frame to the STA.
  • the authentication frame used for the authentication request/response corresponds to a management frame.
  • the authentication frame may include information such as an authentication algorithm number, an authentication transaction sequence number, a status code, a challenge text, a Robust Security Network (RSN), and a Finite Cyclic Group.
  • information such as an authentication algorithm number, an authentication transaction sequence number, a status code, a challenge text, a Robust Security Network (RSN), and a Finite Cyclic Group.
  • RSN Robust Security Network
  • the STA may transmit an authentication request frame to the AP.
  • the AP may determine whether to allow authentication for the STA based on the information included in the received authentication request frame.
  • the AP may provide the result of the authentication processing to the STA through an authentication response frame.
  • a successfully authenticated STA may perform an association process based on step S330.
  • the association process includes a process in which the STA transmits an association request frame to the AP, and in response, the AP transmits an association response frame to the STA.
  • the association request frame may include information related to various capabilities, a beacon listen interval, a service set identifier (SSID), supported rates, supported channels, RSN, mobility domain, supported operating classes, TIM broadcast request, interworking service capabilities, and the like.
  • SSID service set identifier
  • the association response frame may contain information related to various capabilities, status codes, Association ID (AID), supported rates, Enhanced Distributed Channel Access (EDCA) parameter sets, Received Channel Power Indicator (RCPI), Received Signal to Noise Indicator (RSNI), mobility domains, timeout interval (association comeback time), overlapping BSS scan parameters, TIM broadcast response, QoS maps, etc.
  • AID Association ID
  • EDCA Enhanced Distributed Channel Access
  • RCPI Received Channel Power Indicator
  • RSNI Received Signal to Noise Indicator
  • mobility domains timeout interval (association comeback time)
  • association comeback time overlapping BSS scan parameters
  • TIM broadcast response TIM broadcast response
  • QoS maps etc.
  • step S340 the STA may perform a security setup process.
  • the security setup process of step S340 may include a process of performing private key setup, for example, through 4-way handshaking via an Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) frame.
  • EAPOL Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN
  • FIG 4 illustrates one embodiment of multi-link (ML).
  • a plurality of multi-link devices can perform communication over a remote link.
  • the MLDs can be classified into an AP MLD including a plurality of AP STAs and a non-AP MLD including a plurality of non-AP STAs. That is, the AP MLD can include affiliated APs (i.e., AP STAs), and the non-AP MLD can include affiliated STAs (i.e., non-AP STAs, or user-STAs).
  • a multilink may include a first link and a second link, and different channels/subchannels/frequency resources may be allocated to the first and second links.
  • the first and second multilinks may be identified through a link ID of 4 bits in length (or other n bits in length).
  • the first and second links may be configured in the same 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, or 6 GHz band. Alternatively, the first link and the link may be configured in different bands.
  • the AP MLD of FIG. 4 includes three affiliated APs.
  • AP1 may operate in a 2.4 GHz band
  • AP2 may operate in a 5 GHz band
  • AP3 may operate in a 6 GHz band.
  • a first link in which AP1 and non-AP1 operate may be defined by channel/subchannel/frequency resources within the 2.4 GHz band.
  • a second link in the example of FIG. 4 in which AP2 and non-AP2 operate may be defined by channel/subchannel/frequency resources within the 5 GHz band.
  • a third link in the example of FIG. 4 in which AP3 and non-AP3 operate may be defined by channel/subchannel/frequency resources within the 6 GHz band.
  • AP1 can start a multilink setup procedure (ML setup procedure) by transmitting an Association Request frame to non-AP STA1.
  • non-AP STA1 can transmit an Association Response frame in response to the Association Request frame.
  • Each AP (e.g., AP1/2/3) illustrated in FIG. 4 may be identical to the AP illustrated in FIG. 1 and/or FIG. 2, and each non-AP (e.g., non-AP1/2/3) illustrated in FIG. 4 may be identical to a STA (i.e., user-STA or non-AP STA) illustrated in FIG. 1 and/or FIG. 2.
  • Figure 5 illustrates a PPDU (physical protocol data unit or physical layer (PHY) protocol data unit) transmitted/received by an STA of this specification.
  • PPDU physical protocol data unit or physical layer (PHY) protocol data unit
  • the STA (e.g., AP STA, non-AP STA, AP MLD, non-AP MLD) of the present specification can transmit and/or receive the PPDU of FIG. 5.
  • the PPDU described in the present specification can have, for example, the structure of FIG. 5.
  • the PPDU described in the present specification can be called by various names such as UHR (Ultra High Reliability) PPDU, transmission PPDU, reception PPDU, first type or Nth type PPDU, etc.
  • UHR Ultra High Reliability
  • the PPDU described in the present specification can be used in a WLAN system defined according to IEEE 802.11bn and/or a next-generation WLAN system that improves IEEE 802.11bn.
  • the PPDU of FIG. 5 may relate to various PPDU types used in a UHR system.
  • the example of FIG. 5 may be used for at least one of a SU (single-user) mode/type/transmission, a MU (multi-user) mode/type/transmission, and a NDP (null data packet) mode/type/transmission related to channel sounding.
  • the Data field illustrated may be omitted.
  • the PPDU of FIG. 5 is used for a TB (Trigger-based) mode
  • the UHR-SIG of FIG. 5 may be omitted.
  • an STA that has received a Trigger frame for UL-MU (Uplink-MU) communication may transmit a PPDU with the UHR-SIG omitted in the example of FIG. 5.
  • L-STF to UHR-LTF may be called a preamble or a physical preamble, and may be generated/transmitted/received/acquired/decoded in the physical layer (included in the transmitting/receiving STA).
  • Each block illustrated in FIG. 5 may be called a field/subfield/signal, etc.
  • the names of these fields/subfields/signals may be, as illustrated in FIG. 5, L-STF (legacy short training field), L-LTF (legacy long training field), L-SIG (legacy signal), RL-SIG (repeated L-SIG), U-SIG (Universal Signal), UHR-SIG (UHR-signal), etc.
  • the subcarrier spacing of the L-STF, L-LTF, L-SIG, RL-SIG, U-SIG, and UHR-SIG fields of FIG. 5 may be set to 312.5 kHz, and the subcarrier spacing of the UHR-STF, UHR-LTF, and Data fields may be set to 78.125 kHz. That is, the tone index (or subcarrier index) of the L-STF, L-LTF, L-SIG, RL-SIG, U-SIG, and UHR-SIG fields may be expressed in units of 312.5 kHz, and the tone index (or subcarrier index) of the UHR-STF, UHR-LTF, and Data fields may be expressed in units of 78.125 kHz.
  • L-LTF and L-STF can be identical to conventional fields (e.g., non-HT LTF and non-HT STF defined in conventional WLAN standards).
  • the L-SIG field of FIG. 5 may include, for example, 24 bits of bit information.
  • the 24 bits of information may include a 4 bit Rate field, a 1 bit Reserved bit, a 12 bit Length field, a 1 bit Parity bit, and a 6 bit Tail bit.
  • the 12 bit Length field may include information about the length or time duration of the PPDU.
  • the value of the 12 bit Length field may be determined based on the type of the PPDU.
  • the value of the Length field may be determined as a multiple of 3.
  • the value of the Length field may be determined as "a multiple of 3 + 1" or "a multiple of 3 + 2".
  • the value of the Length field can be determined as a multiple of 3
  • the value of the Length field can be determined as "a multiple of 3 + 1" or "a multiple of 3 + 2".
  • the LENGTH field in an UHR PPDU is set to a value satisfying the condition that the remainder is zero when LENGTH is divided by 3.
  • the (non-AP and AP) STA can apply BCC encoding based on a code rate of 1/2 to the 24 bits of information in the L-SIG field. Then, the transmitting STA can obtain 48 bits of BCC coding bits. BPSK modulation can be applied to the 48 bits of coding bits to generate 48 BPSK symbols. The transmitting STA can map the 48 BPSK symbols to positions excluding the pilot subcarriers ⁇ subcarrier index -21, -7, +7, +21 ⁇ and the DC subcarrier ⁇ subcarrier index 0 ⁇ .
  • the 48 BPSK symbols can be mapped to subcarrier indices -26 to -22, -20 to -8, -6 to -1, +1 to +6, +8 to +20, and +22 to +26.
  • the transmitting STA can additionally map the signal of ⁇ -1, -1, -1, 1 ⁇ to the subcarrier indices ⁇ -28, -27, +27, +28 ⁇ .
  • the above signal can be used for channel estimation for the frequency domain corresponding to ⁇ -28, -27, +27, +28 ⁇ .
  • (non-AP and AP) STA can generate RL-SIG, which is generated in the same manner as L-SIG. BPSK modulation can be applied to RL-SIG.
  • the receiving (non-AP and AP) STA can determine that the received PPDU is a HE PPDU, an EHT PPDU, or a UHR PPDU based on the presence of RL-SIG. In other words, the receiving (non-AP and AP) STA can determine that the received PPDU is one of the HE PPDU, EHT PPDU, or UHR PPDU if RL-SIG is present.
  • the receiving (non-AP and AP) STA can determine that the received PPDU is one of the non-HT PPDU, HT PPDU, or VHT PPDU if RL-SIG is not present.
  • the RL-SIG field is a repeat of the L-SIG field and is used to differentiate an UHR PPDU from a non-HT PPDU, HT PPDU, and VHT PPDU.
  • U-SIG Universal SIG
  • U-SIG may be called by various names such as first SIG field, first SIG, first type SIG, control signal, control signal field, first (type) control signal, common control field, common control signal, etc.
  • the U-SIG can contain N bits of information and can contain information for identifying the type of the EHT PPDU.
  • the U-SIG can be formed based on two symbols (e.g., two consecutive OFDM symbols).
  • Each symbol (e.g., OFDM symbol) for the U-SIG can have a duration of 4 us.
  • Each symbol of the U-SIG can be used to transmit 26 bits of information.
  • each symbol of the U-SIG can be transmitted and received based on 52 data tones and 4 pilot tones.
  • a bit information (e.g., 52 un-coded bits) can be transmitted, and the first symbol of U-SIG can transmit the first X bits of information (e.g., 26 un-coded bits) out of the total A bit information, and the second symbol of U-SIG can transmit the remaining Y bits of information (e.g., 26 un-coded bits) out of the total A bit information.
  • the transmitting STA can obtain 26 un-coded bits included in each U-SIG symbol.
  • the transmitting STA can perform BPSK modulation on the interleaved 52-coded bits to generate 52 BPSK symbols allocated to each U-SIG symbol.
  • a single U-SIG symbol can be transmitted based on 56 tones (subcarriers) from subcarrier index -28 to subcarrier index +28, excluding DC index 0.
  • the 52 BPSK symbols generated by the transmitting STA can be transmitted based on the remaining tones (subcarriers) excluding the pilot tones -21, -7, +7, and +21.
  • a bit information (e.g., 52 un-coded bits) transmitted by U-SIG may include a CRC field (e.g., a 4-bit long field) and a tail field (e.g., a 6-bit long field).
  • the CRC field and the tail field may be transmitted through a second symbol of the U-SIG.
  • the CRC field may be generated based on 26 bits allocated to the first symbol of the U-SIG and the remaining 16 bits excluding the CRC/tail field within the second symbol, and may be generated based on a conventional CRC calculation algorithm.
  • the tail field may be used to terminate a trellis of a convolutional decoder and may be set to, for example, "000000".
  • a bit information (e.g., 52 uncoded bits) transmitted by U-SIG (or U-SIG field) can be divided into version-independent bits and version-dependent bits.
  • the size of version-independent bits can be fixed or variable.
  • version-independent bits can be assigned only to the first symbol of U-SIG, or version-independent bits can be assigned to both the first symbol and the second symbol of U-SIG.
  • version-independent bits and version-dependent bits can be called by various names, such as first control bit and second control bit.
  • the version-independent bits of U-SIG may include a 1-bit UL/DL flag field.
  • the first value of the 1-bit UL/DL flag field relates to UL communication
  • the second value of the UL/DL flag field relates to DL communication.
  • the version-independent bits of U-SIG may include information about the length of the TXOP and information about the BSS color ID.
  • a UHR PPDU is classified into various types (e.g., type related to SU transmission (performed based on UL or DL), type related to DL transmission, type related to NDP transmission, type related to DL non-MU-MIMO, type related to DL MU-MIMO, type related to Multi-AP operation, type related to CBF (Coordinated beamforming), SR (Spatial Reuse), type related to C-OFDMA (Coordinated OFDMA), type related to C-TDMA (Coordinated TDMA)), information about the type of the EHT PPDU (e.g., 2-bit or 3-bit information) can be included in the version-dependent bits of the U-SIG.
  • types e.g., type related to SU transmission (performed based on UL or DL), type related to DL transmission, type related to NDP transmission, type related to DL non-MU-MIMO, type related to DL MU-MIMO, type related to Multi-AP operation, type related to CBF (Coordinate
  • U-SIG may include 1) a bandwidth field including information about bandwidth, 2) a field including information about a Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) technique applied to UHR-SIG, 3) an indication field including information about whether a dual subcarrier modulation (DCM) technique is applied to UHR-SIG, 4) a field including information about the number of symbols used for UHR-SIG, 5) a field including information about whether UHR-SIG is generated over the full band, 6) a field including information about the type of UHR-LTF/STF, and 7) a field indicating the length of UHR-LTF and the CP length.
  • MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
  • DCM dual subcarrier modulation
  • Preamble puncturing can be applied to the PPDU of FIG. 5.
  • Preamble puncturing means applying puncturing to a portion of the entire band of the PPDU (e.g., the secondary 20 MHz band). For example, when an 80 MHz PPDU is transmitted, the STA can apply puncturing to the secondary 20 MHz band among the 80 MHz band, and transmit the PPDU only through the primary 20 MHz band and the secondary 40 MHz band.
  • the pattern of preamble puncturing can be set in advance. For example, when the first puncturing pattern is applied, puncturing can be applied only to a secondary 20 MHz band within an 80 MHz band. For example, when the second puncturing pattern is applied, puncturing can be applied only to one of two secondary 20 MHz bands included in a secondary 40 MHz band within an 80 MHz band. For example, when the third puncturing pattern is applied, puncturing can be applied only to a secondary 20 MHz band included in a primary 80 MHz band within a 160 MHz band (or 80+80 MHz band).
  • a primary 40 MHz band included in the primary 80 MHz band within the 160 MHz band (or 80+80 MHz band) is present, and puncturing can be applied to at least one 20 MHz channel that does not belong to the primary 40 MHz band.
  • Information about preamble puncturing applied to the PPDU may be included in the U-SIG and/or UHR-SIG.
  • a first field of the U-SIG may include information about a contiguous bandwidth of the PPDU
  • a second field of the U-SIG may include information about preamble puncturing applied to the PPDU.
  • U-SIG and UHR-SIG may include information regarding preamble puncturing based on the following method. If the bandwidth of the PPDU exceeds 80 MHz, U-SIGs may be individually configured in units of 80 MHz. For example, if the bandwidth of the PPDU is 160 MHz, the PPDU may include a first U-SIG for a first 80 MHz band and a second U-SIG for a second 80 MHz band. In this case, the first field of the first U-SIG may include information regarding the 160 MHz bandwidth, and the second field of the first U-SIG may include information regarding preamble puncturing applied to the first 80 MHz band (i.e., information regarding a preamble puncturing pattern).
  • the first field of the second U-SIG may include information about a 160 MHz bandwidth
  • the second field of the second U-SIG may include information about preamble puncturing applied to the second 80 MHz band (i.e., information about a preamble puncturing pattern).
  • the UHR-SIG continuous to the first U-SIG may include information about preamble puncturing applied to the second 80 MHz band (i.e., information about a preamble puncturing pattern)
  • the UHR-SIG continuous to the second U-SIG may include information about preamble puncturing applied to the first 80 MHz band (i.e., information about a preamble puncturing pattern).
  • U-SIG and UHR-SIG may include information about preamble puncturing based on the following methods.
  • U-SIG may include information about preamble puncturing for all bands (i.e., information about preamble puncturing pattern). That is, UHR-SIG does not include information about preamble puncturing, and only U-SIG may include information about preamble puncturing (i.e., information about preamble puncturing pattern).
  • U-SIG can be configured in 20 MHz units. For example, if an 80 MHz PPDU is configured, U-SIG can be duplicated. That is, four identical U-SIGs can be included in an 80 MHz PPDU. PPDUs exceeding 80 MHz bandwidth can contain different U-SIGs.
  • the UHR-SIG of FIG. 5 may include control information for a receiving STA.
  • the UHR-SIG may be transmitted through at least one symbol, and one symbol may have a length of 4 us.
  • Information about the number of symbols used for the UHR-SIG may be included in the U-SIG.
  • UHR-SIG provides additional signals to the U-SIG field to enable STAs to interpret/decode UHR PPDUs.
  • the UHR-SIG field may contain U-SIG overflow bits that are common to all users.
  • the UHR-SIG field also contains resource allocation information, allowing STAs to look up resources used in fields containing data fields/UHR-STF/UHR-LTF (i.e., UHR modulated fields of an UHR PPDU).
  • the frequency resources of the UHR-LTF, UHR-STF, and data fields illustrated in Fig. 5 can be determined based on RUs (resource units) defined by multiple subcarriers/tones. That is, the UHR-LTF, UHR-STF, and data fields of this specification can be transmitted/received through RUs (resource units) defined by multiple subcarriers/tones.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the layout of resource units (RUs) used for a 20 MHz PPDU. That is, UHR-LTF, UHR-STF and/or data fields included in a 20 MHz PPDU can be transmitted/received through at least one of various RUs defined in FIG. 6.
  • RUs resource units
  • 26 units i.e., units corresponding to 26 tones
  • Six tones can be used as a guard band in the leftmost band of the 20MHz band, and five tones can be used as a guard band in the rightmost band of the 20MHz band.
  • seven DC tones can be inserted in the center band, i.e., the DC band, and 26 units corresponding to 13 tones can exist on the left and right sides of the DC band, respectively.
  • 26 units, 52 units, and 106 units can be allocated to other bands. Each unit can be allocated for a receiving station, i.e., a user.
  • the RU arrangement of Fig. 6 is utilized not only in a situation for multiple users (MUs) but also in a situation for a single user (SU), in which case it is possible to use one 242-unit as shown at the bottom of Fig. 4, in which case three DC tones can be inserted.
  • RUs of various sizes i.e., 26-RU, 52-RU, 106-RU, 242-RU, etc.
  • N-RU may be represented as N-tone RU, etc.
  • 26-RU may be represented as 26-tone RU.
  • Figure 7 is a diagram showing the layout of resource units (RUs) used for 40MHz PPDU.
  • the example of FIG. 7 can also use 26-RU, 52-RU, 106-RU, 242-RU, 484-RU, etc.
  • 5 DC tones can be inserted at the center frequency
  • 12 tones can be used as a guard band in the leftmost band of the 40 MHz band
  • 11 tones can be used as a guard band in the rightmost band of the 40 MHz band.
  • 484-RU can be used when used for a single user. Meanwhile, the specific number of RUs can be changed, which is the same as the example in Fig. 6.
  • Figure 8 is a diagram showing the layout of resource units (RUs) used for 80MHz PPDU.
  • the layout of resource units (RUs) used in this specification may be changed in various ways.
  • the layout of resource units (RUs) used on an 80MHz band may be changed in various ways.
  • Fig. 9 shows an operation according to UL-MU.
  • a transmitting STA e.g., AP
  • a TB (trigger-based) PPDU is transmitted after a delay of SIFS.
  • TB PPDU (941, 942) can be transmitted at the same time zone and can be transmitted from multiple STAs (e.g., User STAs) whose AIDs are indicated in the Trigger frame (930).
  • the ACK frame (950) for TB PPDU can be implemented in various forms.
  • the ACK frame (950) for TB PPDU can be implemented in the form of BA (block ACK).
  • transmission(s) of Trigger Frame (930), TB PPDU (941, 942) and/or ACK frame (950) can be performed within TXOP (925).
  • Figure 10 shows an example of channels used/supported/defined within the 2.4 GHz band.
  • the 2.4 GHz band may be referred to by other names, such as the first band (band), etc.
  • the 2.4 GHz band may refer to a frequency range in which channels with center frequencies adjacent to 2.4 GHz (e.g., channels with center frequencies located within 2.4 to 2.5 GHz) are used/supported/defined.
  • a 2.4 GHz band may include multiple 20 MHz channels.
  • the 20 MHz within the 2.4 GHz band may have multiple channel indices (e.g., indices 1 to 14).
  • a 20 MHz channel to which channel index 1 is assigned may have a center frequency of 2.412 GHz
  • a 20 MHz channel to which channel index 2 is assigned may have a center frequency of 2.417 GHz
  • a 20 MHz channel to which channel index N is assigned may have a center frequency of (2.407 + 0.005*N) GHz.
  • the channel indices may be referred to by various names, such as channel numbers. The specific numerical values of the channel indices and center frequencies may change.
  • FIG. 10 exemplarily shows four channels within a 2.4 GHz band.
  • the illustrated first frequency domain (1010) to fourth frequency domain (1040) may each include one channel.
  • the first frequency domain (1010) may include channel 1 (a 20 MHz channel having an index of 1).
  • the center frequency of channel 1 may be set to 2412 MHz.
  • the second frequency domain (1020) may include channel 6.
  • the center frequency of channel 6 may be set to 2437 MHz.
  • the third frequency domain (1030) may include channel 11.
  • the center frequency of channel 11 may be set to 2462 MHz.
  • the fourth frequency domain (1040) may include channel 14. In this case, the center frequency of channel 14 may be set to 2484 MHz.
  • Figure 11 illustrates an example of channels used/supported/defined within the 5 GHz band.
  • the 5 GHz band may be referred to by other names such as second band/band, etc.
  • the 5 GHz band may refer to a frequency range in which channels having a center frequency of 5 GHz or more but less than 6 GHz (or less than 5.9 GHz) are used/supported/defined.
  • the 5 GHz band may include multiple channels between 4.5 GHz and 5.5 GHz.
  • the specific figures shown in FIG. 11 may be subject to change.
  • UNII-1 may be referred to as UNII Low.
  • UNII-2 may include frequency ranges referred to as UNII Mid and UNII-2Extended.
  • UNII-3 may be referred to as UNII-Upper.
  • the bandwidth of each channel can be variously set to 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz, or 160 MHz.
  • the 5170 MHz to 5330 MHz frequency domain/range within UNII-1 and UNII-2 can be divided into eight 20 MHz channels.
  • the 5170 MHz to 5330 MHz frequency domain/range can be divided into four channels through a 40 MHz frequency domain.
  • the 5170 MHz to 5330 MHz frequency domain/range can be divided into two channels through an 80 MHz frequency domain.
  • the 5170 MHz to 5330 MHz frequency domain/range can be divided into one channel through a 160 MHz frequency domain.
  • Figure 12 illustrates an example of channels used/supported/defined within the 6 GHz band.
  • the 6 GHz band may be referred to by other names such as the third band/band, etc.
  • the 6 GHz band may refer to a frequency range in which channels with center frequencies higher than 5.9 GHz are used/supported/defined.
  • the specific figures shown in Fig. 12 may be subject to change.
  • the 20 MHz channel of Fig. 12 can be defined from 5.940 GHz.
  • the leftmost channel among the 20 MHz channels of Fig. 12 can have an index of 1 (or channel index, channel number, etc.), and a center frequency of 5.945 GHz can be assigned. That is, the center frequency of the index N channel can be determined as (5.940 + 0.005*N) GHz.
  • the indices (or channel numbers) of the 20 MHz channels of FIG. 12 are 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29, 33, 37, 41, 45, 49, 53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77, 81, 85, 89, 93, 97, 101, 105, 109, 113, 117, 121, 125, 129, 133, 137, 141, 145, 149, 153, 157, 161, 165, 169, 173, 177, 181, 185, 189, 193, It can be 197, 201, 205, 209, 213, 217, 221, 225, 229, 233.
  • the indices of the 40 MHz channel in Fig. 12 can be 3, 11, 19, 27, 35, 43, 51, 59, 67, 75, 83, 91, 99, 107, 115, 123, 131, 139, 147, 155, 163, 171, 179, 187, 195, 203, 211, 219, 227.
  • the MAC header illustrated in Fig. 13 may be located at the very front of the MAC frame. That is, the MAC frame may include a MAC header as illustrated in Fig. 13 and MAC body fields/information consecutive to the MAC header.
  • the MAC frame including the MAC header of Fig. 13 is inserted/included in the data field of the PPDU (e.g., UHR PPDU) illustrated in Fig. 5.
  • the MAC frames included in the data field of the PPDU of this specification can be classified into various types.
  • the MAC frames of this specification can be classified into a control frame, a management frame, and a data frame.
  • the management frame includes Association Request, Association Response, Reassociation Request, Reassociation Response, Probe Request, Probe Response, Beacon, Disassociation, Authentication, and Deauthentication frames/signals defined in conventional WLAN.
  • the values of the type fields (B3 and B2) of FIG. 13 are set to 00.
  • the values of the subtype fields (B7, B6, B5, B4) of FIG. 13 are as follows: Association Request (0000), Association Response (0001), Reassociation Request (0010), Reassociation Response (0011), Probe Request (0100), Probe Response (0101), Beacon (1000), Disassociation (1010), Authentication (1011), Deauthentication (1100).
  • control frame includes Trigger Beamforming Report Poll, NDP Announcement (NDPA), Control Frame Extension, Control Wrapper, Block Ack Request (BlockAckReq), Block Ack (BlockAck), PS-Poll, RTS, CTS, Ack, CF-End frames/signals defined in conventional WLAN.
  • NDPA NDP Announcement
  • BlockAckReq Block Ack Request
  • BlockAck BlockAck
  • PS-Poll PS-Poll
  • RTS RTS
  • CTS CTS
  • Ack CF-End frames/signals defined in conventional WLAN.
  • Trigger (0010), Beamforming Report Poll (0100), NDP Announcement (0101), Control Frame Extension (0110), Control Wrapper (0111), BlockAckReq (1000), BlockAck (1001), PS-Poll (1010), RTS (1011), CTS (1100), Ack (1101), CF-End (1110).
  • the data frame includes (QoS) Data, (QoS) Null, etc. defined in conventional WLAN.
  • the value of the type field (B3 and B2) of Fig. 13 is set to 10.
  • the MAC frame/signal used in this specification can be identified through the type field/information and subtype field/information described above.
  • the “trigger frame” in this specification can mean a MAC frame in which the type bits B3 and B2 bits in the frame control field of the MAC header are set to 01, and the subtype bits B7, B6, B5, B4 bits in the frame control field are set to 0010.
  • Various MAC frames described in this specification are inserted/included in the data fields of various PPDUs (e.g., HE/VHT/HE/EHT/UHR PPDUs).
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a modified example of a transmitter and/or receiver of the present specification.
  • the devices (e.g., AP STA, non-AP STA) illustrated in FIGS. 1 to 4 may be modified as illustrated in FIG. 14.
  • the transceiver (630) of FIG. 14 may be identical to the transceiver (113, 123) of FIG. 1.
  • the transceiver (630) of FIG. 14 may include a receiver and a transmitter.
  • the processor (610) of FIG. 14 may be identical to the processor (111, 121) of FIG. 1. Alternatively, the processor (610) of FIG. 14 may be identical to the processing chip (114, 124) of FIG. 1.
  • the memory (150) of Fig. 14 may be the same as the memory (112, 122) of Fig. 1. Alternatively, the memory (150) of Fig. 14 may be a separate external memory different from the memory (112, 122) of Fig. 1.
  • the power management module (611) manages power for the processor (610) and/or the transceiver (630).
  • the battery (612) supplies power to the power management module (611).
  • the display (613) outputs results processed by the processor (610).
  • the keypad (614) receives input to be used by the processor (610).
  • the keypad (614) may be displayed on the display (613).
  • the SIM card (615) may be an integrated circuit used to securely store an international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) and an associated key used to identify and authenticate a subscriber in a mobile phone device, such as a mobile phone and a computer.
  • IMSI international mobile subscriber identity
  • the speaker (640) can output sound-related results processed by the processor (610).
  • the microphone (641) can receive sound-related input to be used by the processor (610).
  • the maximum Duration of a PPDU based on HT/VHT/HE/EHT/UHR can be up to 5.484ms.
  • the maximum duration of a PPDU can be determined based on a parameter called aPPDUmaxtime.
  • This specification may relate to a new type/format/category of PPDU which improves the conventional PPDU.
  • the new type/format/category of PPDU related to the operation of this specification may be called by various names.
  • the PPDU related to the operation of this specification may be used by various names such as Small PPDU, Short PPDU, Low latency PPDU, TX PPDU, RX PPDU, 1st/2nd PPDU, etc.
  • the name Small PPDU is used for convenience of explanation, but the technical features of this specification are not limited to this name Small PPDU.
  • the small PPDU related to the present specification may have a maximum duration set shorter than that of a conventional PPDU. Additionally or alternatively, the small PPDU may have the same aPPDUmaxtime parameter as that of a conventional PPDU, but its duration may be set shorter than that of a conventional PPDU based on a parameter/field/subfield newly defined in the WIFI standard or a conventional parameter/field/subfield. Additionally or alternatively, the small PPDU may be a PPDU that does not include a Low latency PPDU. For example, the Low latency PPDU may be a PPDU that carries Low latency traffic.
  • the Low latency traffic may be identified based on at least one of QoS/AC (Access category)/TID (Traffic ID)/Delay/latency assigned to the corresponding traffic. Additionally or alternatively, the small PPDU may mean a set of a plurality of PPDUs for which immediate ACK is not required and delayed ACK is allowed.
  • the small PPDU may mean a PPDU configured based on a new structured preamble presented in the present specification (for example, a preamble in which the Legacy preamble is omitted as described below, or a preamble including only HE/EHT/UHR-LTF, or a preamble including only HE/EHT/UHR-STF and HE/EHT/UHR-LTF).
  • the small PPDU of the present specification may include a preamble and a data field consecutive to the preamble, and the data field may include a PSDU (Physical Service Data Unit).
  • PSDU Physical Service Data Unit
  • the small PPDU related to the present specification may be distinguished from a conventional PPDU based on at least one criterion/definition presented above.
  • Conventional PPDUs which are distinct from the newly proposed PPDUs in this specification (e.g., small PPDUs), may be called by various names.
  • various names such as long/large/legacy/HT/VHT/HE/EHT/UHR-PPDU may be used.
  • the small PPDU may be determined independently of the length of the duration of the PPDU. For example, whether it is a small PPDU may be determined based on the physical version of the PPDU, or whether it is a small PPDU may be determined based on the type of the PPDU. In this case, information about the type of the PPDU may be included in the U-SIG field of the PPDU, and/or the EHT/UHR-SIG field.
  • Figure 15 relates to operations performed in the device proposed in this specification.
  • the illustrated TXOP holder (1500) acquires a TXOP.
  • the method of acquiring the TXOP may be based on a method of exchanging an RTS frame and a CTS frame according to a conventional wireless LAN standard, or may be based on transmitting a conventional CTS-to-self frame, or may be based on a conventional TWT (target wake time) setting. That is, the definition of the TXOP holder of the present specification may be the same as that of the conventional wireless LAN standard.
  • STA1 (1501) may be a TXOP responder. That is, the definition of the TXOP responder of the present specification may be the same as that of the conventional wireless LAN standard.
  • the TXOP responder (e.g., STA1 (1501)) of the present specification may mean an STA that can receive a response frame for a frame received from a TXOP holder during a frame exchange sequence, but does not acquire a TXOP in a related processor.
  • the above TXOP holder can be a non-AP, an AP, and the TXOP responder can be an AP, a non-AP.
  • An example of Fig. 15 is a case where the TXOP holder is an AP, and accordingly, the TXOP obtained in Fig. 15 can be expressed by various names such as DL-TXOP.
  • Small PPDUs may be transmitted sequentially within one TXOP according to an example of FIG. 15.
  • other PPDUs such as Low Latency (LL) PPDUs or responses thereto (e.g., ACK/Block ACK)
  • LL Low Latency
  • ACK/Block ACK responses thereto
  • an LL PPDU (1540) and an ACK/BA (1550) for the corresponding LL PPDU may be transmitted and received between multiple small PPDUs (1510, 1520, 1560).
  • a signal referred to as LL PPDU in this specification may include not only an LL PPDU but also a response (e.g., Ack/BA) to the LL PPDU.
  • the example of FIG. 15 relates to an example in which an LL PPDU is transmitted to a third STA (i.e., STA2 (1520)) that is not a TXOP responder or TXOP holder via downlink. That is, the example relates to an example in which a transmitting transmitting STA (e.g., TXOP holder (1500)) preempts an on-going transmission within an already acquired TXOP and transmits an LL PPDU via downlink. That is, the example of FIG. 15 relates to an example in which DL-preemption is applied in a situation in which a DL-TXOP is acquired. In case of transmitting an LL PPDU (1540) via downlink based on DL-preemption as in FIG.
  • a transmitting transmitting STA e.g., TXOP holder (1500)
  • DL-preemption is applied in a situation in which a DL-TXOP is acquired.
  • STA2 (1502) may transmit a response (1550) to the LL PPDU (1540) because it is not a TXOP responder. That is, the TXOP holder (1500)
  • various frames e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.
  • STA2 (1502) may set NAV (e.g., intra-BSS NAV) due to the received frame.
  • NAV e.g., intra-BSS NAV
  • the TXOP holder can transmit the LL PPDU after xIFS (e.g., after SIFS has elapsed) of the PPDU (e.g., small PPDU (1520)) transmitted by the TXOP holder.
  • xIFS e.g., after SIFS has elapsed
  • the PPDU e.g., small PPDU (1520)
  • an STA other than the TXOP holder e.g., an STA that is neither a TXOP holder nor a TXOP responder
  • permission from the TXOP holder may include signaling such as an indication from the TXOP holder that it may use frequency resources within the corresponding TXOP and/or allocation of frequency resources.
  • signaling such as an indication from the TXOP holder that it may use frequency resources within the corresponding TXOP and/or allocation of frequency resources.
  • STA2 transmission of ACK/BA for LL PPDU
  • it can be indicated in each Small PPDU whether transmission and reception of the LL PPDU is allowed or not after xIFS (e.g., after SIFS has elapsed) after the end of transmission of the corresponding Small PPDU.
  • the U-SIG (and/or UHR-SIG) of at least one Small PPDU (or all Small PPDUs) may include a Preemption flag (PF) subfield.
  • the PF subfield may have a length of 1 bit.
  • Preemption may not be allowed as in the conventional manner. That is, an STA (e.g., STA2 (1502)) that is neither a TXOP holder nor a TXOP responder cannot transmit an LL PPDU (e.g., including an ACK/BA for the LL PPDU) during the previously acquired TXOP.
  • STA e.g., STA2 (1502)
  • LL PPDU e.g., including an ACK/BA for the LL PPDU
  • Preemption may be allowed.
  • an STA that is neither a TXOP holder nor a TXOP responder e.g., STA2 (1502)
  • STA2 1502
  • can transmit an LL PPDU e.g., including an ACK/BA for the LL PPDU
  • the technical features described above are not limited to the example of FIG. 15.
  • the example of FIG. 15 can be modified in various ways.
  • the example of FIG. 15 is a situation in which an LL PPDU is transmitted to a third STA other than a TX-holder/responder through a downlink in a DL-TXOP, that is, a situation in which DL-TXOP and DL-preemption are applied.
  • the technical features described above can be applied to a situation in which DL-TXOP and UL-preemption are applied, a situation in which UL-TXOP and DL-preemption are applied, and a situation in which UL-TXOP and UL-preemption are applied.
  • a situation in which DL-TXOP and UL-preemption are applied can be related to the example of FIG. 16.
  • a situation in which UL-TXOP and DL-preemption are applied may be a situation in which a non-AP operates as a TXOP holder and an AP operates as a TXOP responder, and the AP transmits an LL PPDU to a third-party STA (i.e., a STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder) through downlink.
  • a third-party STA i.e., a STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder
  • a situation in which UL-TXOP and UL-preemption are applied may be a situation in which a non-AP operates as a TXOP holder and an AP operates as a TXOP responder, and a third-party STA (i.e., a STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder) transmits an LL PPDU to the AP through uplink.
  • a third-party STA i.e., a STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder
  • Fig. 16 relates to another operation performed in the device proposed in the present specification.
  • the example of Fig. 16 can be expressed as a situation in which DL-TXOP and UL-preemption are applied.
  • the situation is that at least one small PPDU and LL PPDU are exchanged in a situation in which one DL-TXOP (not shown) is acquired by a TXOP holder (1600).
  • STA2 (1602) may, for example, have a PF subfield of U-SIG (and/or UHR-SIG) included in the Small PPDUs (1610 and/or 1620) have a preset value (e.g., “1”), and the value of the corresponding PF subfield may mean that DL-preemption is allowed, as in the example of FIG. 15.
  • STA2 (1602) may transmit a Tx request frame (1640) after xIFS (e.g., SIFS) has elapsed from the Small PPDU (1620).
  • xIFS e.g., SIFS
  • the above TX request frame (1640) is a frame used to request transmission of an LL PPDU (or a PPDU that satisfies a specific condition or transmits traffic related to a specific QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency) of a third-party STA other than the TXOP holder/responder, and can be defined in various ways and called by various names.
  • the TX request frame (1640) can be transmitted to a TXOP holder.
  • the Tx request frame (1640) can be transmitted for the permission of an STA having data to transmit (or data to transmit that satisfies a specific condition).
  • the Tx request frame (1640) can mean a frame that notifies the TXOP holder (1600) of a request to transmit low latency traffic, as shown in FIG. 16.
  • the Tx request frame (1640) can be defined in various ways.
  • the Tx request frame (1640) can include part/all of the structure of a conventional CTS frame. That is, the TX request frame (1640) can be defined as a frame transmitted in response to a conventional RTS frame, and can be defined as a control frame in the same manner as a conventional CTS frame.
  • the TX request frame (1640) may include a 2-octet frame control field, a duration field (2 octets long) continuous to the field, and a RA (receiver address) field (6 octets long) continuous to the field, and the RA field may be set to a value of a TA (transmitter address) field of the RTS frame.
  • the Tx request frame (1640) may include a newly defined frame structure.
  • the Tx request frame (1640) may be transmitted based on a SFN (single frequency network) in the same way as a conventional CTS frame.
  • the TXOP holder (1600) can transmit an indication.
  • An example of the indication may be the polling (1650) illustrated in FIG. 16. Additionally, alternatively, an example of the indication may be a trigger frame of a conventional wireless LAN standard. In addition, an example of the indication may include sequential transmission of an NFRP (NDP feedback report poll), an NFR (NDP feedback report), and a Trigger frame of a conventional wireless LAN standard.
  • a third STA (e.g., STA2 (1602)) that is not the TXOP holder/responder can transmit an LL PPDU (1660).
  • xIFS defined in the wireless LAN standard.
  • an example of xIFS may be SIFS/PIFS defined in the wireless LAN standard.
  • the IFS between each PPDU/frame may be set to different values depending on the situation and PPDU type.
  • the TXOP holder is AP, but as described above, the technical features of this specification may also be applied to UL-TXOP.
  • a specific STA e.g., a third-party STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder
  • receive various frames e.g., intra-BSS PPDU, RTS frame, CTS frame, CTS-to-self frame/PPDU
  • set (or update) NAV e.g., intra-BSS NAV
  • Such STA may not transmit specific packets (e.g., LL-PPDU described above, or PPDU carrying traffic satisfying specific conditions or related to specific QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency) due to the set/updated NAV during the DL-TXOP and/or UL-TXOP.
  • a NAV setting/update technique performed in an STA when preemption is allowed within the DL/UL-TXOP for example, when the LL-PPDU, etc. can be transmitted by the third STA
  • a NAV setting/update technique performed in an STA that has received a small PPDU allowing the above-described preemption for example, a small PPDU including the PF subfield
  • the existing behavior within a TXOP is as follows: i.e., the behavior of an STA within a TXOP where preemption is not allowed, and/or the behavior of an STA that receives a small PPDU that does not include signaling allowing preemption is described below.
  • the existing operation of the TXOP holder can be as follows.
  • a TXOP holder can transmit a PPDU (without contention within the TXOP it has acquired), and can indicate information about the length (or duration) of the TXOP and the length (or duration) of the PPDU through the PPDU.
  • the length of the PPDU can be indicated through the Length information (e.g., conventional 12-bit length information) of the L-SIG field included in the PPDU.
  • the remaining length (or duration) of the TXOP can be roughly indicated through the control bit of the U-SIG field included in the PPDU.
  • the remaining duration of the TXOP is less than 512 ⁇ s, the remaining duration can be indicated in units of 4 ⁇ s, and if the remaining duration of the TXOP is 512 ⁇ s or more, the remaining duration can be indicated in units of 64 ⁇ s).
  • the Duration field of the MAC header can indicate the remaining TXOP duration in units of ⁇ s.
  • a TXOP responder can receive and decode a PPDU, and if it contains its own STA-ID (e.g., included in EHT/UHR-SIG) and/or Address (e.g., included in MAC header), it can receive data assigned to it. After the corresponding PPDU is finished, it can prepare to receive PPDU again.
  • preparation for reception can include energy detection, preamble detection, and decoding.
  • the existing behavior of a third STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder may be as follows:
  • Third-party STAs e.g., BSS/OBSS STAs
  • BSS/OBSS STAs that are not TXOP holders and responders set NAVs for the corresponding TXOP.
  • transmission may not be performed during the time corresponding to the corresponding NAV, and only PPDU reception may be performed.
  • the NAV may be an intra-BSS NAV or a basic NAV.
  • TXOP/small PPDU where preemption is allowed is described.
  • TXOP responder the operation of TXOP holder, TXOP responder, and a third STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder are described individually.
  • the TXOP holder performs the same operation as described in the “Technical Feature-1A” described above. However, after a Small PPDU with Preemption allowed is transmitted and received, the TXOP holder’s PPDU may be transmitted, but the TXOP holder must recognize that the Tx request frame described above may be received from STAs. For example, it is possible to prepare for reception considering that a Tx request frame may be received from STAs after SIFS elapsed from the Small PPDU, and to transmit the TXOP holder’s PPDU after PIFS elapsed if the frame is not received.
  • the TXOP responder performs the same operations as those described in the “Technical Feature-1B” described above.
  • the Tx request frame described above may be transmitted to request transmission of the PPDU of the TXOP responder as well as reception of the next PPDU.
  • the Tx request frame described above may be transmitted after SIFS has elapsed from the Small PPDU, and if there is no Tx request frame to be transmitted, the PPDU may be prepared for reception after PIFS has elapsed.
  • a third-party STA e.g., BSS STA and/or OBSS STA
  • BSS STA and/or OBSS STA e.g., BSS STA and/or OBSS STA
  • a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder may not perform NAV setting/update after receiving a Small PPDU with preemption allowed (e.g., a small PPDU including a U-SIG including the PF subfield with a preset value) (or within a TXOP with preemption allowed).
  • a Small PPDU with preemption allowed e.g., a small PPDU including a U-SIG including the PF subfield with a preset value
  • the methods of not performing NAV setting/update may be implemented in various ways. For example, even if there is a previously set/updated NAV (e.g., an intra-BSS NAV) within the STA, the STA may ignore (or not consider) the NAV when receiving a Small PPDU with preemption allowed.
  • NAV e.g., an intra-BSS NAV
  • the STA may ignore the NAV because it does not need to consider the NAV.
  • the STA can ignore the NAV and transmit specific PPDUs (e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU carrying traffic satisfying specific conditions or related to specific QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.) to the TXOP holder within the TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder (e.g., within the DL/UL TXOP where preemption is allowed).
  • specific PPDUs e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU carrying traffic satisfying specific conditions or related to specific QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.
  • a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder can set a NAV during a duration indicated by a small PPDU (e.g., duration information included in an L-SIG field in the small PPDU or duration information indicated by an A-MPDU in the small PPDU), and release the NAV after the corresponding NAV ends.
  • a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder can set the NAV based on the small PPDU, rather than setting the NAV based on a signal received during acquisition of the TXOP (e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.).
  • a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder may ignore the NAV even if the NAV is set based on a signal (e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.) received in the process of acquiring a TXOP, and may set the NAV based on the small PPDU.
  • a signal e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.
  • the NAV is set based on a signal (e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.) received in the process of acquiring a TXOP
  • a signal e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.
  • the duration of the NAV may become very long, and thus a problem may occur in which a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder cannot transmit LL PPDU, etc. for a long period of time.
  • a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder may set a NAV based on the duration indicated by the Small PPDU (e.g., a small PPDU including a U-SIG including the PF subfield with a preset value) after receiving a Small PPDU for which preemption is allowed (or within a TXOP for which preemption is allowed) (e.g., a small PPDU including a U-SIG including the PF subfield with a preset value).
  • a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder may ignore (or may not consider) the NAV set based on a signal (e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.) received during the process of acquiring a TXOP.
  • a signal e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.
  • the various actions of ignoring the NAV described above may not be applied to STAs that cannot determine whether Preemption is allowed and/or STAs that do not recognize the Type of Small PPDU (e.g. EHT STAs and STAs of earlier versions, or UHR STAs that do not allow Preemption, etc.).
  • the various operations of ignoring NAV described above can be applied only to STAs that are not TXOP holder/responders but have PPDUs to transmit.
  • the operation of ignoring NAV may not be applied to all BSS STAs that are not TXOP holder/responders.
  • BSS STAs that are not TXOP holder/responders only STAs that transmit traffic/PPDUs that meet specific conditions (e.g., LL PPDUs, TX request frames for transmitting LL PPDUs, ACK/BAs for LL PPDUs, PPDUs that convey traffic that meets specific conditions or is related to specific QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.) can ignore NAV. More specifically, BSS STAs that are not TXOP holder/responders can determine whether to ignore NAVs that have been previously set/updated.
  • specific conditions e.g., LL PPDUs, TX request frames for transmitting LL PPDUs, ACK/BAs for LL PPDUs, PPDUs that convey traffic that meets specific conditions or is related to specific QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.
  • a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder can i) set a NAV (e.g., intra-BSS NAV) based on a signal (e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.) received during the process of acquiring a TXOP, and ii) ignore (or do not consider) the NAV if a specific condition is satisfied.
  • a NAV e.g., intra-BSS NAV
  • a signal e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.
  • the “specific condition” is determined based on a) whether the BSS STA is not a TXOP holder/responder; and b) whether the BSS STA transmits traffic/PPDU satisfying a specific condition (e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU conveying traffic satisfying a specific condition or related to specific QoS/AC(access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.). That is, the NAV can be ignored (or not considered) only when the BSS STA is not a TXOP holder/responder and the BSS STA transmits traffic/PPDU that meets certain conditions. In other cases, the NAV may not be ignored.
  • a specific condition e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU conveying traffic satisfying a specific condition or related to specific QoS
  • NAV can be implemented in various ways. For example, even if NAV is set according to a conventional technique (for example, intra-BSS NAV is set/updated according to a conventional technique based on RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.), the corresponding NAV can be ignored when transmitting the Tx request frame for LL PPDU. In this way, even if the NAV is set/updated, transmitting without considering the corresponding NAV can be considered ignoring the NAV.
  • a conventional technique for example, intra-BSS NAV is set/updated according to a conventional technique based on RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.
  • the technical feature of ignoring (or not considering) NAV as described above may be used only in certain cases.
  • the technical feature described above i.e., the technical feature of ignoring NAV
  • the technical feature described above may not be applied.
  • the transmission of the Tx request frame described above may be restricted.
  • the Small PPDU is composed of a UL PPDU (i.e., the DL/UL subfield, which is a 1-bit subfield of the U-SIG field included in the Small PPDU, indicates ‘UL’)
  • the Tx request frames of Non-AP STAs may not be permitted regardless of the value of the PF subfield included in the U-SIG field.
  • the above-described “Technical Feature-2C” and “Technical Feature-2D” may be applied to all STAs that are not TXOP holder/responders, or may be applied only to BSS STAs that are not TXOP holder/responders. For example, if the above-described “Technical Feature-2C” and “Technical Feature-2D” are not applied to an OBSS STA, even if the OBSS STA receives a Small PPDU of an Inter-BSS with Preemption allowed, it may set a basic NAV as in the prior art (i.e., set a NAV for the inter-BSS based on the received small PPDU) and may not transmit the above-described Tx request frame. The basic NAV set as above may be ignored when SR (spatial reuse) is considered.
  • SR spatial reuse
  • an OBSS STA may transmit and receive with STAs (including APs) within the OBSS by using the Spatial reuse technique without transmitting the aforementioned Tx request frame to the TXOP holder.
  • OBSS PD Power Detection
  • a packet/PPDU may be transmitted within the OBSS if the interference level of the STA (including AP) is lower than or equal to the OBSS PD level.
  • the OBSS PD level may be set in advance between the AP and STAs within the OBSS, and may also be shared (negotiated or announced) in advance with the BSS AP.
  • an OBSS STA may determine whether a surrounding wireless channel is busy or idle based on the OBSS PD level.
  • the OBSS PD level related to the SR technique may have a threshold set higher than a normal PD level (for example, a threshold set 10 dBm higher than the conventional one). Through this, the OBSS STA can determine a wireless channel, which is determined to be busy if it were a conventional PD level, as idle.
  • the OBSS STA applying the OBSS PD level as described above can transmit a PPDU within the OBSS based on the transmission power set based on the threshold value of the increased PD level.
  • the OBSS STA can transmit a PPDU based on the increased PD Level (i.e., OBSS PD level) and the maximum value of the reduced transmission power within the OBSS even while the basic NAV is being set (i.e., while the BSS TXOP is being set).
  • Methods for allowing Preemption in this specification can be implemented in various ways. That is, methods for allowing an STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder to transmit traffic/PPDU satisfying specific conditions (e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU conveying traffic satisfying specific conditions or related to specific QoS/AC(access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.) to the TXOP holder during an existing acquired TXOP can be implemented in various ways. For example, at least one of the technical features described in the above-mentioned “Technical Feature-2A” to “Technical Feature-2E” can be used.
  • specific conditions e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU conveying traffic satisfying specific conditions or related to specific QoS/AC(access category)/TID
  • Preemption may be permitted in the following manner:
  • the AP/STA e.g., TXOP holder
  • the TXOP holder can set a short TXOP while transmitting a conventional RTS frame or PPDU (e.g., Small PPDU). That is, the value of the duration information included in the corresponding RTS frame or PPDU can be set short.
  • xIFS e.g., SIFS
  • the TXOP holder can immediately retransmit the RTS frame or PPDU (e.g. Small PPDU) (without performing contention for channel access).
  • the value of the duration information of the retransmitted RTS/PPDU is set short.
  • the TXOP holder can perform the above operations as many times as necessary to obtain a number of consecutive short TXOPs, which can achieve the same effect as setting a long TXOP.
  • the maximum length of the sum of a number of consecutive short TXOPs that the TXOP holder can acquire can be limited.
  • the maximum length of the sum of the number of short TXOPs can be set based on the maximum length of an existing single TXOP.
  • an example of a specific method for setting a short TXOP is as follows. For example, when acquiring/setting a TXOP based on the exchange of an RTS frame and a CTS frame, the TXOP holder can set the Duration/ID field of the MAC header of the RTS frame to ‘0’ to set the length of the TXOP short. Additionally or alternatively, the TXOP holder can set the value of the Duration/ID field of the MAC header of the RTS frame based on the start or end of the Small PPDU transmitted and received after the exchange of the RTS/CTS frames.
  • the TXOP holder can set the value of the Duration/ID field of the MAC header of the RTS frame short so as to cover only the Small PPDU (and ACK/BA for the small PPDU) transmitted and received after the exchange of the RTS/CTS frames. Additionally or alternatively, when acquiring/setting TXOP based on Small PPDU, the TXOP holder may set the Duration/ID field of A-MPDU constituting the corresponding PPDU to ‘0’. Additionally or alternatively, when acquiring/setting TXOP based on Small PPDU, the TXOP holder may set the Duration/ID field of A-MPDU constituting the corresponding PPDU to be short enough to cover only until the end of the corresponding PPDU.
  • the STAs that require preemption can transmit the above-described Tx request frame after the short TXOP ends and the NAV that they set/updated themselves is released.
  • the above-described Tx request frame can be transmitted at the right time without performing the technical feature of ignoring the NAV (e.g., the feature described in “Technical Feature-2C” to “Technical Feature-2E” described above).
  • STAs that require preemption can be configured not to attempt to transmit their PPDUs (e.g., uplink PPDU transmissions) for a preset period of time even if their NAVs are released.
  • Figure 17 is an example of a procedure flow diagram of this specification.
  • Each step of FIG. 17 can be performed by various STAs (AP-STA, Relay STA, non-AP STA) of the WLAN system.
  • the STA performing each step of FIG. 17 may be a BSS STA (and/or OBSS STA) that is not a TXOP holder/responder. Additionally or alternatively, the STA performing each step of FIG.
  • 17 may be an STA that transmits traffic/PPDU satisfying a specific condition (e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU conveying traffic satisfying a specific condition or related to a specific QoS/AC(access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.) to the TXOP holder, among the BSS STAs (and/or OBSS STAs) that are not a TXOP holder/responder.
  • a specific condition e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU conveying traffic satisfying a specific condition or related to a specific QoS/AC(access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.
  • the STA can set a network allocation vector (NAV).
  • the expression of setting a NAV can be replaced with the expression of updating a NAV.
  • the STA can acquire various signals (e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.) transmitted and received during the process of acquiring a DL/UL-TXOP by the TXOP holder, and set the NAV based on the signals acquired in this way.
  • the NAV set in step S1710 can correspond to the length of one TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder.
  • the STA can set NAV based on intra-BSS PPDU.
  • the intra-BSS PPDU can include RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame related to TXOP acquisition.
  • the intra-BSS PPDU can include PPDU transmitted by TXOP holder/responder.
  • the intra-BSS PPDU can include common control field (e.g., U-SIG field), and the common control field can include BSS color field of, for example, 6 bits.
  • the STA can identify whether the received PPDU is intra-BSS PPDU or inter-BSS PPDU based on the BSS color field.
  • the STA can set/update NAV (e.g., intra-BSS NAV) based on the received PPDU. Specifically, the STA may set/update the NAV (e.g., intra-BSS NAV) based on a TXOP field (e.g., 7-bit information) included in a common control field (e.g., U-SIG field) of a received intra-BSS PPDU and/or based on duration/ID information included in a MAC header within the intra-BSS PPDU.
  • NAV e.g., intra-BSS NAV
  • the STA determines whether to ignore the set NAV. For example, the STA may determine whether to ignore the NAV set/updated based on step S1710 within one TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder.
  • the operation of ignoring the set NAV may be implemented in various ways. Accordingly, the expression of ignoring the set NAV may be replaced with another expression. For example, ignoring the set NAV may mean not considering the set NAV, changing the set NAV value to a preset value (e.g., ‘0’), or releasing the set NAV value.
  • the step of determining whether to ignore NAV according to step S1720 may be based on the contents of “Technical Feature-2C”, “Technical Feature-2D”, and “Technical Feature-2E” described above.
  • a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder may not perform NAV setting/update after receiving a Small PPDU with preemption allowed (e.g., a small PPDU including a U-SIG including the PF subfield with a preset value) (or within a TXOP with preemption allowed).
  • a Small PPDU with preemption allowed e.g., a small PPDU including a U-SIG including the PF subfield with a preset value
  • the STA may a) determine whether it is a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder, and b) determine whether it has received a Small PPDU with preemption allowed.
  • step S1720 may include a) determining whether it is a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder, and b) determining whether it has received a Small PPDU with preemption allowed. For example, if the conditions/determinations of “a)” and “b)” described above are not satisfied, the STA cannot ignore the previously set NAV.
  • a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder may ignore the NAV even if the NAV is set based on a signal received during the process of acquiring a TXOP (e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.) and set the NAV based on the duration indicated by the Small PPDU (e.g., duration information included in the L-SIG field of the small PPDU or duration information indicated by the A-MPDU of the small PPDU).
  • a TXOP e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.
  • the STA can a) determine whether it is a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder, and b) determine whether the Small PPDU includes a duration indicating a NAV (e.g., duration information included in the L-SIG field of the small PPDU or duration information indicated by the A-MPDU of the small PPDU). That is, step S1720 may include a) determining whether it is a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder, and b) determining whether a Small PPDU with preemption allowed is received and the Small PPDU includes a duration indicating NAV. For example, if the conditions/judgments of “a)” and “b)” described above are not satisfied, the STA cannot ignore the previously set NAV.
  • a NAV e.g., duration information included in the L-SIG field of the small PPDU or duration information indicated by the A-MPDU of the small PPDU.
  • a STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder and transmits traffic/PPDU that meets specific conditions (e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU that carries traffic that meets specific conditions or is related to specific QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.) may ignore NAV.
  • specific conditions e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU that carries traffic that meets specific conditions or is related to specific QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.
  • a STA can a) determine whether it is a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder, b) determine whether it has received a Small PPDU with Preemption allowed, and c) determine whether it transmits traffic/PPDU that meets specific conditions. That is, step S1720 may include a) determining whether the STA is a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder, b) determining whether the STA has received a Small PPDU for which Preemption is allowed, and c) determining whether the STA transmits traffic/PPDU that meets a specific condition.
  • the STA cannot ignore the previously set NAV. Not all of the above conditions/judgments are essential components, and some of the conditions/judgments may be omitted. For example, since various methods of signaling whether preemption is allowed can be implemented, the judgment/judgment of “b)” described above may be omitted.
  • a transmission operation is performed based on whether to ignore the NAV. That is, an STA that determines to ignore the NAV in step S1720 can ignore the previously set NAV and transmit traffic/PPDU (e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU conveying traffic satisfying a specific condition or related to a specific QoS/AC(access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.) (to the TXOP holder).
  • traffic/PPDU e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU conveying traffic satisfying a specific condition or related to a specific QoS/AC(access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.
  • an STA that determines to ignore the NAV can perform an operation of ignoring the previously set NAV and transmitting the above-described TX request frame, transmitting the LL PPDU, or transmitting the ACK/BA for the LL PPDU, etc., during a TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder.
  • the STA can ignore the previously set NAV and transmit a request signal related to the low latency packet (i.e., the TX request frame described above).
  • the step of transmitting the TX request frame described above is not a mandatory step. For example, if it is not determined by step S1720 that the NAV is to be ignored, the step of transmitting the TX request frame may be omitted.
  • An STA that determines not to ignore the NAV at step S1720 performs subsequent operations according to the previously set NAV (S1730). That is, since subsequent operations are performed according to the NAV set at step S1710, transmission is not started until the corresponding NAV is released. In other words, during the TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder, only a reception operation can be performed without performing a transmission operation.
  • the technical features of the present specification may be performed by various devices.
  • the device of the present specification may be the device described in FIG. 1/FIG. 14.
  • the device of the present specification may include at least one processor; and at least one computer memory operably connectable to the at least one processor, storing instructions for performing operations based on being executed by the at least one processor.
  • the processor may be the processor described in FIG. 1 and/or FIG. 14. That is, as described above, the processor of the present specification may include at least one of a digital signal processor (DSP), a central processing unit (CPU), a graphics processing unit (GPU), and a modem (modulator and demodulator).
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • CPU central processing unit
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • modem modulator and demodulator
  • the processor may include not only computers having various architectures such as single/multiprocessor architecture, sequential (Von Neumann)/parallel architecture, but also specialized circuits such as FPGAs, ASICs, signal processing devices, and other devices.
  • the processor of the present specification may be a SNAPDRAGON® series processor manufactured by Qualcomm®, an EXYNOS® series processor manufactured by Samsung®, an A series processor manufactured by Apple®, a HELIO® series processor manufactured by MediaTek®, an ATOM® series processor manufactured by INTEL®, or a processor that enhances these.
  • the instructions may mean computer program instructions executed by the at least one processor.
  • the (computer program) instructions provide logic and/or routines that enable the technical features of the present specification (the technical features described in at least one of FIGS. 15 to 17) to be performed by the processor.
  • the at least one processor can load and execute the computer program by reading the at least one memory.
  • the computer program(s) defined by the above instructions can arrive at the device (e.g., STA) of the present specification via a suitable delivery mechanism.
  • the delivery mechanism can be, for example, a computer-readable storage medium, a computer program product, a memory device, a recording medium such as a CD-ROM or DVD, or a product tangibly embodying a computer program.
  • the delivery mechanism can be a signal configured to reliably transmit the computer program via a wireless or electrical connection.
  • the above (computer program) instructions may include software or firmware for a programmable processor (e.g., programmable content of a hardware device whether instructions for a processor, or configuration settings for a fixed-function device, gate array or programmable logic device, etc.).
  • a programmable processor e.g., programmable content of a hardware device whether instructions for a processor, or configuration settings for a fixed-function device, gate array or programmable logic device, etc.
  • the memory may be the memory described in FIG. 1 and/or FIG. 14. That is, as described above, the memory of the present specification may store control information related to the operation of the STA of the present specification or information about a signal transmitted and received by the STA (e.g., a PPDU including a management/control/data frame).
  • control information related to the operation of the STA of the present specification or information about a signal transmitted and received by the STA (e.g., a PPDU including a management/control/data frame).
  • the technical features of the present specification may be implemented as at least one computer readable medium (CRM).
  • CRM includes instructions that are based on execution by at least one processor as described above.
  • the instructions stored in the CRM may be the computer program instructions as described above.
  • the device of the present disclosure may further include a transceiver.
  • the transceiver may be operably connectable to the memory/processor, etc.
  • the transceiver may be the transceiver illustrated in FIG. 1 and/or FIG. 14.
  • the technical features of the present specification described above can be applied to various applications or business models.
  • the technical features described above can be applied to wireless communication in devices that support artificial intelligence (AI).
  • AI artificial intelligence
  • Machine learning refers to a field that defines various problems in the field of artificial intelligence and studies the methodologies for solving them.
  • Machine learning is also defined as an algorithm that improves the performance of a task through constant experience with that task.
  • An artificial neural network is a model used in machine learning, and can refer to a model with problem-solving capabilities that consists of artificial neurons (nodes) that form a network by combining synapses.
  • An artificial neural network can be defined by the connection pattern between neurons in different layers, the learning process that updates model parameters, and the activation function that generates the output value.
  • An artificial neural network may include an input layer, an output layer, and optionally one or more hidden layers. Each layer may include one or more neurons, and the artificial neural network may include synapses connecting neurons. In an artificial neural network, each neuron may output a function value of an activation function for input signals, weights, and biases input through synapses.
  • Model parameters refer to parameters that are determined through learning, including the weights of synaptic connections and the biases of neurons.
  • Hyperparameters refer to parameters that must be set before learning in machine learning algorithms, including learning rate, number of iterations, mini-batch size, and initialization functions.
  • the goal of learning an artificial neural network can be seen as determining model parameters that minimize the loss function.
  • the loss function can be used as an indicator for determining optimal model parameters during the learning process of an artificial neural network.
  • Machine learning can be classified into supervised learning, unsupervised learning, and reinforcement learning depending on the learning method.
  • Supervised learning refers to a method of training an artificial neural network when labels for training data are given.
  • the labels can refer to the correct answer (or result value) that the artificial neural network should infer when training data is input to the artificial neural network.
  • Unsupervised learning can refer to a method of training an artificial neural network when labels for training data are not given.
  • Reinforcement learning can refer to a learning method that trains an agent defined in a certain environment to select actions or action sequences that maximize cumulative rewards in each state.
  • machine learning implemented with a deep neural network (DNN: Deep Neural Network) that includes multiple hidden layers is also called deep learning, and deep learning is a part of machine learning.
  • DNN Deep Neural Network
  • machine learning is used to mean including deep learning.
  • a robot can mean a machine that automatically processes or operates a given task by its own abilities.
  • a robot that has the ability to recognize the environment, make judgments, and perform actions on its own can be called an intelligent robot.
  • Robots can be classified into industrial, medical, household, and military types depending on their intended use or field. Robots can perform various physical actions, such as moving robot joints, by having a drive unit that includes an actuator or motor. In addition, mobile robots have a drive unit that includes wheels, brakes, and propellers, and can drive on the ground or fly in the air through the drive unit.
  • Extended reality is a general term for virtual reality (VR), augmented reality (AR), and mixed reality (MR).
  • VR technology provides real-world objects and backgrounds only as CG images
  • AR technology provides virtual CG images on top of real-world object images
  • MR technology is a computer graphics technology that mixes and combines virtual objects in the real world.
  • MR technology is similar to AR technology in that it shows real objects and virtual objects together. However, there is a difference in that while AR technology uses virtual objects to complement real objects, MR technology uses virtual and real objects with equal characteristics.
  • XR technology can be applied to HMD (Head-Mount Display), HUD (Head-Up Display), mobile phones, tablet PCs, laptops, desktops, TVs, digital signage, etc., and devices to which XR technology is applied can be called XR devices.
  • HMD Head-Mount Display
  • HUD Head-Up Display
  • mobile phones tablet PCs, laptops, desktops, TVs, digital signage, etc.
  • XR devices devices to which XR technology is applied.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The technical features of the present disclosure can relate to a method performed in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system. One embodiment of the present disclosure can relate to a method performed in a WLAN system. According to the described method, a station (STA) can set a network allocation vector (NAV) on the basis of an intra basic service set (BSS) physical protocol data unit (PPDU). For example: the STA can determine whether to consider the NAV on the basis of a packet to be transmitted by the STA and whether the STA is either a transmission opportunity (TXOP) holder or a TXOP responder; and, if the STA is neither the TXOP holder nor the TXOP responder and the packet to be transmitted is related to a low latency packet, the STA may not consider the NAV.

Description

무선랜 시스템 상에서 스테이션의 데이터 전송Data transmission from a station on a wireless LAN system

본 명세서는 무선랜 시스템에 관련된 것으로, 보다 구체적으로는, 무선랜 시스템의 스테이션이 TXOP((transmission opportunity) 내에서 데이터를 전송하는 방법 및 장치에 관련된다. The present specification relates to a wireless LAN system, and more specifically, to a method and device for a station of a wireless LAN system to transmit data within a TXOP (transmission opportunity).

무선랜 또는 WLAN(wireless local area network)은 다양한 방식으로 개선되어왔다. 예를 들어, EHT(Extreme high throughput) 규격은 새롭게 제안되는 증가된 대역폭, 개선된 PPDU(PHY layer protocol data unit) 구조, 개선된 시퀀스, HARQ(Hybrid automatic repeat request) 기법 등을 사용할 수 있다. EHT 규격은 IEEE 802.11be 규격으로 불릴 수 있다.Wireless LAN or WLAN (wireless local area network) has been improved in various ways. For example, the EHT (Extreme high throughput) standard can use newly proposed increased bandwidth, improved PPDU (PHY layer protocol data unit) structure, improved sequence, and HARQ (Hybrid automatic repeat request) technique. The EHT standard can be called the IEEE 802.11be standard.

EHT 규격은 high throughput 및 높은 data rate를 지원하기 위해서, 넓은 대역폭(예를 들어, 160/320MHz), 16 stream, 및/또는 멀티 링크(또는 멀티 밴드) 동작 등이 사용될 수 있다.The EHT specification supports high throughput and high data rates, which may include wide bandwidth (e.g., 160/320 MHz), 16 streams, and/or multi-link (or multi-band) operation.

EHT 규격에서, high throughput을 위해서 wide bandwidth(예를 들어, 160/240/320MHz)가 사용될 수 있다. 또한 bandwidth를 효율적으로 사용하기 위해서 preamble puncturing 및 multiple RU 전송이 사용될 수 있다. In the EHT specification, wide bandwidth (e.g., 160/240/320MHz) can be used for high throughput. In addition, preamble puncturing and multiple RU transmission can be used to efficiently use bandwidth.

WLAN 시스템은 UHR(Ultra High Reliability) 규격을 통해 추가로 개선될 수 있다. UHR 시스템은 IEEE 802.11bn 규격으로 불릴 수 있다. UHR 시스템은 STA에 대한 신호 전송 시 ultra-high reliability를 지원을 목표로 하고 있다. UHR 시스템은 이를 위해서 high throughput, low latency, extended range 지원 등을 위한 다양한 기술이 고려되고 있다. WLAN systems can be further improved through the UHR (Ultra High Reliability) standard. The UHR system can be called the IEEE 802.11bn standard. The UHR system aims to support ultra-high reliability when transmitting signals to STAs. For this purpose, various technologies are being considered for the UHR system, such as high throughput, low latency, and extended range support.

WLAN 시스템은 TXOP를 획득한 STA(station)에서 통신이 개시될 수 있다. 즉 종래 WLAN 시스템에는 TXOP가 종료하기 전까지는 종래의 표준에서 정의되는 TXOP 홀더/리스폰더가 데이터를 송신할 수 있고, 다른 STA의 데이터 송신은 제한된다. In a WLAN system, communication can be initiated from an STA (station) that has acquired a TXOP. That is, in a conventional WLAN system, a TXOP holder/responder defined in a conventional standard can transmit data until the TXOP ends, and data transmission by other STAs is restricted.

종래 WLAN 시스템에는 TXOP가 종료하기 전까지는 종래의 표준에서 정의되는 TXOP 홀더/리스폰더가 데이터를 송신할 수 있고, 다른 STA의 데이터 송신은 제한된다. 그러나 해당 TXOP가 종료되기 전에 신속하게 데이터/패킷/신호가 송신되어야 하는 경우가 발생할 수 있다. 이러한 경우에도 종래의 TXOP에 관한 기술적 특징을 사용하는 경우 데이터의 레이턴시가 증가하는 문제가 발생할 수 있다. In conventional WLAN systems, the TXOP holder/responder defined in the conventional standard can transmit data until the TXOP ends, and data transmission by other STAs is restricted. However, there may be cases where data/packets/signals must be transmitted quickly before the TXOP ends. In such cases, if the technical features of conventional TXOPs are used, the problem of increased data latency may occur.

본 명세서는 종래의 TXOP 및/또는 NAV(network allocation vector)에 관한 동작을 개선한다. 이를 통해 기존에 설정된 TXOP 동안 레이턴시 낮은 데이터를 송신하지 못하는 기술적 문제를 해결할 수 있다. This specification improves the operation of conventional TXOP and/or NAV (network allocation vector). This can solve the technical problem of not being able to transmit low latency data during the existing configured TXOP.

본 명세서는 다양한 기술적 특징을 제안한다. 본 명세서의 다양한 기술적 특징은 특정한 STA(Station), 프로세서, 명령어 등에 관련될 수 있다. This specification proposes various technical features. Various technical features of this specification may be related to specific STAs (Stations), processors, instructions, etc.

예를 들어 본 명세서의 기술적 특징은 특정한 STA에서 수행되는 방법에 관련될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 본 명세서의 일례는 무선 랜(Wireless Local Area Network; WLAN) 시스템에서 수행되는 방법에 관련될 수 있다. 상술한 방법에 따르면, STA(station)은, 인트라(intra) BSS(basic service set) PPDU(Physical Protocol Data Unit)를 기반으로 NAV(network allocation vector)를 설정할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 STA이 TXOP(transmission opportunity) 홀더(holder) 및 TXOP 리스폰더(responder) 중 어느 하나인지 여부 및 상기 STA이 송신할 패킷(packet)을 기초로, 상기 STA은 상기 NAV를 고려(consider)할지 여부를 판단할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 STA이 상기 TXOP 홀더가 아니고 상기 TXOP 리스폰더가 아니면서, 송신할 패킷이 저지연 패킷(low latency packet)에 관련되는 경우, 상기 STA은 상기 NAV를 고려하지 않을 수 있다. For example, the technical features of the present specification may relate to a method performed in a specific STA. For example, an example of the present specification may relate to a method performed in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) system. According to the above-described method, a station (STA) may set a network allocation vector (NAV) based on an intra BSS (basic service set) PPDU (Physical Protocol Data Unit). For example, based on whether the STA is one of a TXOP (transmission opportunity) holder and a TXOP responder and a packet to be transmitted by the STA, the STA may determine whether to consider the NAV. For example, if the STA is neither the TXOP holder nor the TXOP responder and the packet to be transmitted is related to a low latency packet, the STA may not consider the NAV.

본 명세서에 기재된 기술적 특징은 다양한 유리한 효과를 발생시킬 수 있다. 종래의 WLAN 규격에 따르면 TXOP가 획득된 이후에는 TXOP 내에서는 TXOP 홀더/리스폰더가 데이터를 송신할 수 있고, 다른 STA의 데이터 송신은 제한된다. 그러나 해당 TXOP가 종료되기 전에 신속하게 데이터/패킷/신호가 송신되어야 하는 경우가 발생할 수 있다. 이러한 경우에도 종래의 TXOP에 관한 기술적 특징을 사용하는 경우 데이터의 레이턴시가 증가하는 문제가 발생할 수 있다. The technical features described in this specification can bring about various advantageous effects. According to the conventional WLAN standard, after a TXOP is acquired, the TXOP holder/responder can transmit data within the TXOP, and data transmission by other STAs is restricted. However, there may be cases where data/packets/signals must be transmitted quickly before the TXOP ends. Even in such cases, if the technical features related to the conventional TXOP are used, the problem of increased data latency may occur.

본 명세서는 종래의 TXOP 및/또는 NAV에 관한 동작을 개선한다. 이를 통해 기존에 설정된 TXOP 동안 특정한 요건을 만족하는 데이터를 송신하지 못하는 기술적 문제를 해결할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 본 명세서를 통해 TXOP 동안에도 데이터를 송신하는 것이 가능해지는 경우, 레이턴시 낮은 데이터의 송신에 불필요한 딜레이가 발생하는 것이 방지될 수 있다. This specification improves the operation of conventional TXOP and/or NAV. This can solve the technical problem of not being able to transmit data satisfying specific requirements during a previously set TXOP. For example, if it is possible to transmit data even during a TXOP through this specification, unnecessary delay in the transmission of low-latency data can be prevented.

도 1은 본 명세서의 송신 장치 및/또는 수신 장치의 일례를 나타낸다. Figure 1 illustrates an example of a transmitter and/or receiver device of the present specification.

도 2는 무선랜(WLAN)의 구조를 나타낸 개념도이다.Figure 2 is a conceptual diagram showing the structure of a wireless local area network (WLAN).

도 3은 일반적인 링크 셋업(link setup) 과정을 설명하는 도면이다. Figure 3 is a diagram illustrating a general link setup process.

도 4는 멀티 링크(Multi-link; ML)의 일 실시예를 설명한다. Figure 4 illustrates one embodiment of multi-link (ML).

도 5는 본 명세서의 STA에서 송신/수신되는 PPDU가 설명된다.Figure 5 describes a PPDU transmitted/received by an STA of this specification.

도 6은 20MHz PPDU를 위해 사용되는 자원유닛(RU)의 배치를 나타내는 도면이다.Figure 6 is a diagram showing the layout of resource units (RUs) used for 20MHz PPDU.

도 7은 40MHz PPDU를 위해 사용되는 자원유닛(RU)의 배치를 나타내는 도면이다. Figure 7 is a diagram showing the layout of resource units (RUs) used for 40MHz PPDU.

도 8은 80MHz PPDU를 위해 사용되는 자원유닛(RU)의 배치를 나타내는 도면이다. Figure 8 is a diagram showing the layout of resource units (RUs) used for 80MHz PPDU.

도 9는 UL-MU에 따른 동작을 나타낸다. Figure 9 shows the operation according to UL-MU.

도 10은 2.4 GHz 밴드 내에서 사용/지원/정의되는 채널의 일례를 나타낸다. Figure 10 shows an example of channels used/supported/defined within the 2.4 GHz band.

도 11은 5 GHz 밴드 내에서 사용/지원/정의되는 채널의 일례를 도시한다. Figure 11 illustrates an example of channels used/supported/defined within the 5 GHz band.

도 12는 6 GHz 밴드 내에서 사용/지원/정의되는 채널의 일례를 도시한다. Figure 12 illustrates an example of channels used/supported/defined within the 6 GHz band.

도 13은 MAC 프레임의 헤더의 일례를 나타낸다. Figure 13 shows an example of a MAC frame header.

도 14는 본 명세서의 송신 장치 및/또는 수신 장치의 변형된 일례를 나타낸다. FIG. 14 illustrates a modified example of a transmitter and/or receiver of the present specification.

도 15는 본 명세서에서 제안되는 장치에서 수행되는 동작에 관련된다. Figure 15 relates to operations performed in the device proposed in this specification.

도 16은 본 명세서에서 제안되는 장치에서 수행되는 또 다른 동작에 관련된다. Fig. 16 relates to another operation performed in the device proposed in the present specification.

도 17은 본 명세서의 절차 흐름도의 일례이다.Figure 17 is an example of a procedure flow diagram of this specification.

본 명세서에서 “A 또는 B(A or B)”는 “오직 A”, “오직 B” 또는 “A와 B 모두”를 의미할 수 있다. 달리 표현하면, 본 명세서에서 “A 또는 B(A or B)”는 “A 및/또는 B(A and/or B)”으로 해석될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 본 명세서에서 “A, B 또는 C(A, B or C)”는 “오직 A”, “오직 B”, “오직 C”, 또는 “A, B 및 C의 임의의 모든 조합(any combination of A, B and C)”를 의미할 수 있다.As used herein, “A or B” can mean “only A,” “only B,” or “both A and B.” In other words, as used herein, “A or B” can be interpreted as “A and/or B.” For example, as used herein, “A, B or C” can mean “only A,” “only B,” “only C,” or “any combination of A, B and C.”

본 명세서에서 사용되는 슬래쉬(/)나 쉼표(comma)는 “및/또는(and/or)”을 의미할 수 있다. 예를 들어, “A/B”는 “A 및/또는 B”를 의미할 수 있다. 이에 따라, “A/B”는 “오직 A”, “오직 B”, 또는 “A와 B 모두”를 의미할 수 있다. 예를 들어, “A, B, C”는 “A, B 또는 C”를 의미할 수 있다.As used herein, a slash (/) or a comma can mean “and/or.” For example, “A/B” can mean “A and/or B.” Accordingly, “A/B” can mean “only A,” “only B,” or “both A and B.” For example, “A, B, C” can mean “A, B, or C.”

본 명세서에서 “적어도 하나의 A 및 B(at least one of A and B)”는, “오직 A”, “오직 B” 또는 “A와 B 모두”를 의미할 수 있다. 또한, 본 명세서에서 “적어도 하나의 A 또는 B(at least one of A or B)”나 “적어도 하나의 A 및/또는 B(at least one of A and/or B)”라는 표현은 “적어도 하나의 A 및 B(at least one of A and B)”와 동일하게 해석될 수 있다. As used herein, “at least one of A and B” can mean “only A”, “only B” or “both A and B”. Additionally, as used herein, the expressions “at least one of A or B” or “at least one of A and/or B” can be interpreted identically to “at least one of A and B”.

또한, 본 명세서에서 사용되는 괄호는 “예를 들어(for example)”를 의미할 수 있다. 구체적으로, “제어 정보(UHR-Signal 필드)”로 표시된 경우, “제어 정보”의 일례로 “UHR-Signal 필드”가 제안된 것일 수 있다. 달리 표현하면 본 명세서의 “제어 정보”는 상기 “UHR -Signal 필드”로 제한(limit)되지 않고, “UHR -Signal 필드”가 “제어 정보”의 일례로 제안될 것일 수 있다. 또한, “제어 정보(UHR-Signal 필드)”로 표시된 경우에도, “제어 정보”의 일례로 “UHR-Signal 필드”가 제안된 것일 수 있다. In addition, the parentheses used in this specification may mean “for example”. Specifically, when it is indicated as “control information (UHR-Signal field)”, the “UHR-Signal field” may be proposed as an example of the “control information”. In other words, the “control information” in this specification is not limited to the “UHR -Signal field”, and the “UHR -Signal field” may be proposed as an example of the “control information”. In addition, even when it is indicated as “control information (UHR-Signal field)”, the “UHR-Signal field” may be proposed as an example of the “control information”.

또한, 본 명세서에서 사용되는 “a/an”은 “적어도 하나(at least one)” 또는 “하나 또는 그 이상(one or more)”를 의미할 수 있다. 또한 “(s)”로 끝나는 용어는 “적어도 하나(at least one)” 또는 “하나 또는 그 이상(one or more)”를 의미할 수 있다. Additionally, as used herein, “a/an” can mean “at least one” or “one or more.” Additionally, a term ending with “(s)” can mean “at least one” or “one or more.”

또한 본 명세서에서 사용하는 “기초로 하는(based on)” 또는 “기반으로 하는(on the basis of)” 또는 “에 따라(according to)”의 표현은 “적어도 기초로 하는(based at least in part on)”를 의미하며, “오로지 하나를 기반으로 하는(based sonly on)”을 의미하지 않는다. Additionally, the expressions “based on” or “on the basis of” or “according to” as used herein mean “based at least in part on” and not “based sonly on.”

본 명세서에서 하나의 도면 내에서 개별적으로 설명되는 기술적 특징은, 개별적으로 구현될 수도 있고, 동시에 구현될 수도 있다.Technical features individually described in a single drawing in this specification may be implemented individually or simultaneously.

본 명세서의 이하의 일례는 다양한 무선 통신시스템에 적용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 본 명세서의 이하의 일례는 무선랜(wireless local area network, WLAN) 시스템에 적용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 본 명세서는 IEEE 802.11a/g/n/ac/ax/be/bn의 규격에 적용될 수 있다. 또한 본 명세서의 일례는 UHR(Ultra High Reliability)규격 또는 IEEE 802.11bn를 개선(enhance)한 차세대(next-generation) 무선랜 규격에도 적용될 수 있다. 또한 본 명세서의 일례는 이동 통신 시스템에 적용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 3GPP(3rd Generation Partnership Project) 규격에 기반하는 LTE(Long Term Evolution) 및 그 진화(evolution)에 기반하는 이동 통신 시스템에 적용될 수 있다. The following examples of this specification can be applied to various wireless communication systems. For example, the following examples of this specification can be applied to a wireless local area network (WLAN) system. For example, the present specification can be applied to the standards of IEEE 802.11a/g/n/ac/ax/be/bn. In addition, the examples of this specification can be applied to the UHR (Ultra High Reliability) standard or the next-generation wireless LAN standard that enhances IEEE 802.11bn. In addition, the examples of this specification can be applied to a mobile communication system. For example, the examples of this specification can be applied to a mobile communication system based on the LTE (Long Term Evolution) and its evolution based on the 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) standard.

이하 본 명세서의 기술적 특징을 설명하기 위해 본 명세서가 적용될 수 있는 기술적 특징을 설명한다. In order to explain the technical features of this specification, the technical features to which this specification can be applied are described below.

도 1은 본 명세서의 송신 장치 및/또는 수신 장치의 일례를 나타낸다. Figure 1 illustrates an example of a transmitter and/or receiver device of the present specification.

도 1의 일례는 이하에서 설명되는 다양한 기술적 특징을 수행할 수 있다. 도 1은 적어도 하나의 STA(station)에 관련된다. 예를 들어, 본 명세서의 STA(110, 120)은 이동 단말(mobile terminal), 무선 기기(wireless device), 무선 송수신 유닛(Wireless Transmit/Receive Unit; WTRU), 사용자 장비(User Equipment; UE), 이동국(Mobile Station; MS), 이동 가입자 유닛(Mobile Subscriber Unit) 또는 단순히 유저(user) 등의 다양한 명칭으로도 불릴 수 있다. 본 명세서의 STA(110, 120)은 네트워크, 기지국(Base Station), Node-B, AP(Access Point), 리피터, 라우터, 릴레이 등의 다양한 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다. 본 명세서의 STA(110, 120)은 수신 장치(apparatus), 송신 장치, 수신 STA, 송신 STA, 수신 Device, 송신 Device 등의 다양한 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다. An example of FIG. 1 can perform various technical features described below. FIG. 1 relates to at least one STA (station). For example, the STA (110, 120) of the present specification may also be called by various names such as a mobile terminal, a wireless device, a Wireless Transmit/Receive Unit (WTRU), a User Equipment (UE), a Mobile Station (MS), a Mobile Subscriber Unit, or simply a user. The STA (110, 120) of the present specification may also be called by various names such as a network, a base station, a Node-B, an Access Point (AP), a repeater, a router, and a relay. The STA (110, 120) of the present specification may also be called by various names such as a receiving apparatus, a transmitting apparatus, a receiving STA, a transmitting STA, a receiving device, and a transmitting device.

예를 들어, STA(110, 120)은 AP(access Point) 역할을 수행하거나 non-AP 역할을 수행할 수 있다. 즉, 본 명세서의 STA(110, 120)은 AP 및/또는 non-AP의 기능을 수행할 수 있다. 본 명세서에서 AP는 AP STA으로도 표시될 수 있다. For example, STA (110, 120) may perform an AP (access point) role or a non-AP role. That is, STA (110, 120) of this specification may perform functions of AP and/or non-AP. In this specification, AP may also be indicated as AP STA.

본 명세서의 STA(110, 120)은 IEEE 802.11 규격 이외의 다양한 통신 규격을 함께 지원할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 3GPP 규격에 따른 통신 규격(예를 들어, LTE, LTE-A, 5G NR 규격)등을 지원할 수 있다. 또한 본 명세서의 STA은 휴대 전화, 차량(vehicle), 개인용 컴퓨터 등의 다양한 장치로 구현될 수 있다. 또한, 본 명세서의 STA은 음성 통화, 영상 통화, 데이터 통신, 자율 주행(Self-Driving, Autonomous-Driving) 등의 다양한 통신 서비스를 위한 통신을 지원할 수 있다. The STA (110, 120) of this specification can support various communication standards other than the IEEE 802.11 standard. For example, it can support communication standards according to the 3GPP standard (e.g., LTE, LTE-A, 5G NR standard). In addition, the STA of this specification can be implemented as various devices such as a mobile phone, a vehicle, a personal computer, etc. In addition, the STA of this specification can support communication for various communication services such as voice call, video call, data communication, and autonomous driving (Self-Driving, Autonomous-Driving).

본 명세서에서 STA(110, 120)은 IEEE 802.11 표준의 규정을 따르는 매체 접속 제어(medium access control, MAC)와 무선 매체에 대한 물리 계층(Physical Layer) 인터페이스를 포함할 수 있다. In this specification, STA (110, 120) may include a medium access control (MAC) and a physical layer interface for a wireless medium that follows the regulations of the IEEE 802.11 standard.

도 1의 부도면 (a)를 기초로 STA(110, 120)을 설명하면 이하와 같다. Based on the sub-drawing (a) of Fig. 1, STA (110, 120) is explained as follows.

제1 STA(110)은 프로세서(111), 메모리(112) 및 트랜시버(113)를 포함할 수 있다. 도시된 프로세서, 메모리 및 트랜시버는 각각 별도의 칩으로 구현되거나, 적어도 둘 이상의 블록/기능이 하나의 칩을 통해 구현될 수 있다. The first STA (110) may include a processor (111), a memory (112), and a transceiver (113). The illustrated processor, memory, and transceiver may each be implemented as separate chips, or at least two blocks/functions may be implemented through one chip.

제1 STA의 트랜시버(113)는 신호의 송수신 동작을 수행한다. 구체적으로, IEEE 802.11 패킷(예를 들어, IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax/be 등)을 송수신할 수 있다. The transceiver (113) of the first STA performs signal transmission and reception operations. Specifically, it can transmit and receive IEEE 802.11 packets (e.g., IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax/be, etc.).

예를 들어, 제1 STA(110)은 AP의 의도된 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 예를 들어, AP의 프로세서(111)는 트랜시버(113)를 통해 신호를 수신하고, 수신 신호를 처리하고, 송신 신호를 생성하고, 신호 송신을 위한 제어를 수행할 수 있다. AP의 메모리(112)는 트랜시버(113)를 통해 수신된 신호(즉, 수신 신호)를 저장할 수 있고, 트랜시버를 통해 송신될 신호(즉, 송신 신호)를 저장할 수 있다. For example, the first STA (110) can perform the intended operation of the AP. For example, the processor (111) of the AP can receive a signal through the transceiver (113), process the received signal, generate a transmission signal, and perform control for signal transmission. The memory (112) of the AP can store a signal received through the transceiver (113) (i.e., a reception signal) and store a signal to be transmitted through the transceiver (i.e., a transmission signal).

예를 들어, 제2 STA(120)은 Non-AP STA의 의도된 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 예를 들어, non-AP의 트랜시버(123)는 신호의 송수신 동작을 수행한다. 구체적으로, IEEE 802.11 패킷(예를 들어, IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax/be 등)을 송수신할 수 있다. For example, the second STA (120) can perform the intended operation of the Non-AP STA. For example, the transceiver (123) of the non-AP performs a signal transmission and reception operation. Specifically, it can transmit and receive IEEE 802.11 packets (e.g., IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax/be, etc.).

예를 들어, Non-AP STA의 프로세서(121)는 트랜시버(123)를 통해 신호를 수신하고, 수신 신호를 처리하고, 송신 신호를 생성하고, 신호 송신을 위한 제어를 수행할 수 있다. Non-AP STA의 메모리(122)는 트랜시버(123)를 통해 수신된 신호(즉, 수신 신호)를 저장할 수 있고, 트랜시버를 통해 송신될 신호(즉, 송신 신호)를 저장할 수 있다. For example, the processor (121) of the Non-AP STA can receive a signal through the transceiver (123), process the received signal, generate a transmission signal, and perform control for signal transmission. The memory (122) of the Non-AP STA can store a signal received through the transceiver (123) (i.e., a reception signal) and store a signal to be transmitted through the transceiver (i.e., a transmission signal).

예를 들어, 이하의 명세서에서 AP로 표시된 장치의 동작은 제1 STA(110) 또는 제2 STA(120)에서 수행될 수 있다. 예를 들어 제1 STA(110)이 AP인 경우, AP로 표시된 장치의 동작은 제1 STA(110)의 프로세서(111)에 의해 제어되고, 제1 STA(110)의 프로세서(111)에 의해 제어되는 트랜시버(113)를 통해 관련된 신호가 송신되거나 수신될 수 있다. 또한, AP의 동작에 관련된 제어 정보나 AP의 송신/수신 신호는 제1 STA(110)의 메모리(112)에 저장될 수 있다. 또한, 제2 STA(110)이 AP인 경우, AP로 표시된 장치의 동작은 제2 STA(120)의 프로세서(121)에 의해 제어되고, 제2 STA(120)의 프로세서(121)에 의해 제어되는 트랜시버(123)를 통해 관련된 신호가 송신되거나 수신될 수 있다. 또한, AP의 동작에 관련된 제어 정보나 AP의 송신/수신 신호는 제2 STA(110)의 메모리(122)에 저장될 수 있다.For example, in the specification below, the operation of a device indicated as AP may be performed in the first STA (110) or the second STA (120). For example, when the first STA (110) is an AP, the operation of the device indicated as AP may be controlled by the processor (111) of the first STA (110), and a related signal may be transmitted or received through a transceiver (113) controlled by the processor (111) of the first STA (110). In addition, control information related to the operation of the AP or a transmission/reception signal of the AP may be stored in the memory (112) of the first STA (110). In addition, when the second STA (110) is an AP, the operation of the device indicated as an AP is controlled by the processor (121) of the second STA (120), and a related signal may be transmitted or received through a transceiver (123) controlled by the processor (121) of the second STA (120). In addition, control information related to the operation of the AP or a transmission/reception signal of the AP may be stored in the memory (122) of the second STA (110).

예를 들어, 이하의 명세서에서 non-AP(또는 User-STA)로 표시된 장치의 동작은 제 STA(110) 또는 제2 STA(120)에서 수행될 수 있다. 예를 들어 제2 STA(120)이 non-AP인 경우, non-AP로 표시된 장치의 동작은 제2 STA(120)의 프로세서(121)에 의해 제어되고, 제2 STA(120)의 프로세서(121)에 의해 제어되는 트랜시버(123)를 통해 관련된 신호가 송신되거나 수신될 수 있다. 또한, non-AP의 동작에 관련된 제어 정보나 AP의 송신/수신 신호는 제2 STA(120)의 메모리(122)에 저장될 수 있다. 예를 들어 제1 STA(110)이 non-AP인 경우, non-AP로 표시된 장치의 동작은 제1 STA(110)의 프로세서(111)에 의해 제어되고, 제1 STA(120)의 프로세서(111)에 의해 제어되는 트랜시버(113)를 통해 관련된 신호가 송신되거나 수신될 수 있다. 또한, non-AP의 동작에 관련된 제어 정보나 AP의 송신/수신 신호는 제1 STA(110)의 메모리(112)에 저장될 수 있다. For example, in the specification below, the operation of a device indicated as a non-AP (or User-STA) may be performed in the first STA (110) or the second STA (120). For example, if the second STA (120) is a non-AP, the operation of the device indicated as a non-AP may be controlled by the processor (121) of the second STA (120), and a related signal may be transmitted or received through the transceiver (123) controlled by the processor (121) of the second STA (120). In addition, control information related to the operation of the non-AP or the transmission/reception signal of the AP may be stored in the memory (122) of the second STA (120). For example, if the first STA (110) is a non-AP, the operation of a device indicated as a non-AP is controlled by the processor (111) of the first STA (110), and a related signal may be transmitted or received through a transceiver (113) controlled by the processor (111) of the first STA (120). In addition, control information related to the operation of the non-AP or the transmission/reception signal of the AP may be stored in the memory (112) of the first STA (110).

이하의 명세서에서 (송신/수신) STA, 제1 STA, 제2 STA, STA1, STA2, AP, 제1 AP, 제2 AP, AP1, AP2, (송신/수신) Terminal, (송신/수신) device, (송신/수신) apparatus, 네트워크 등으로 불리는 장치는 도 1의 STA(110, 120)을 의미할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 구체적인 도면 부호 없이 (송신/수신) STA, 제1 STA, 제2 STA, STA1, STA2, AP, 제1 AP, 제2 AP, AP1, AP2, (송신/수신) Terminal, (송신/수신) device, (송신/수신) apparatus, 네트워크 등으로 표시된 장치도 도 1의 STA(110, 120)을 의미할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 이하의 일례에서 다양한 STA이 신호(예를 들어, PPPDU)를 송수신하는 동작은 도 1의 트랜시버(113, 123)에서 수행되는 것일 수 있다. 또한, 이하의 일례에서 다양한 STA이 송수신 신호를 생성하거나 송수신 신호를 위해 사전에 데이터 처리나 연산을 수행하는 동작은 도 1의 프로세서(111, 121)에서 수행되는 것일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 송수신 신호를 생성하거나 송수신 신호를 위해 사전에 데이터 처리나 연산을 수행하는 동작의 일례는, 1) PPDU 내에 포함되는 서브 필드(SIG, STF, LTF, Data) 필드의 비트 정보를 결정/획득/구성/연산/디코딩/인코딩하는 동작, 2) PPDU 내에 포함되는 서브 필드(SIG, STF, LTF, Data) 필드를 위해 사용되는 시간 자원이나 주파수 자원(예를 들어, 서브캐리어 자원) 등을 결정/구성/획득하는 동작, 3) PPDU 내에 포함되는 서브 필드(SIG, STF, LTF, Data) 필드를 위해 사용되는 특정한 시퀀스(예를 들어, 파일럿 시퀀스, STF/LTF 시퀀스, SIG에 적용되는 엑스트라 시퀀스) 등을 결정/구성/획득하는 동작, 4) STA에 대해 적용되는 전력 제어 동작 및/또는 파워 세이빙 동작, 5) ACK 신호의 결정/획득/구성/연산/디코딩/인코딩 등에 관련된 동작을 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 이하의 일례에서 다양한 STA이 송수신 신호의 결정/획득/구성/연산/디코딩/인코딩을 위해 사용하는 다양한 정보(예를 들어, 필드/서브필드/제어필드/파라미터/파워 등에 관련된 정보)는 도 1의 메모리(112, 122)에 저장될 수 있다. In the following specification, devices called (transmitting/receiving) STA, first STA, second STA, STA1, STA2, AP, first AP, second AP, AP1, AP2, (transmitting/receiving) Terminal, (transmitting/receiving) device, (transmitting/receiving) apparatus, network, etc. may refer to the STA (110, 120) of FIG. 1. For example, devices indicated as (transmitting/receiving) STA, first STA, second STA, STA1, STA2, AP, first AP, second AP, AP1, AP2, (transmitting/receiving) Terminal, (transmitting/receiving) device, (transmitting/receiving) apparatus, network, etc. without specific drawing symbols may also refer to the STA (110, 120) of FIG. 1. For example, in the example below, the operation of various STAs transmitting and receiving signals (e.g., PPPDUs) may be performed by the transceiver (113, 123) of Fig. 1. In addition, in the example below, the operation of various STAs generating transmission and reception signals or performing data processing or calculations in advance for transmission and reception signals may be performed by the processor (111, 121) of Fig. 1. For example, an example of an operation for generating a transmit/receive signal or performing data processing or calculation in advance for a transmit/receive signal may include: 1) an operation for determining/acquiring/configuring/computing/decoding/encoding bit information of a subfield (SIG, STF, LTF, Data) field included in a PPDU, 2) an operation for determining/configuring/acquiring time resources or frequency resources (e.g., subcarrier resources) used for a subfield (SIG, STF, LTF, Data) field included in a PPDU, 3) an operation for determining/configuring/acquiring specific sequences (e.g., pilot sequences, STF/LTF sequences, extra sequences applied to SIG) used for a subfield (SIG, STF, LTF, Data) field included in a PPDU, 4) a power control operation and/or a power saving operation applied to an STA, 5) an operation related to determining/acquiring/configuring/computing/decoding/encoding an ACK signal, etc. In addition, in the examples below, various information (e.g., information related to fields/subfields/control fields/parameters/power, etc.) used by various STAs for determining/acquiring/configuring/computing/decoding/encoding transmission/reception signals can be stored in the memory (112, 122) of Fig. 1.

상술한 도 1의 부도면 (a)의 장치/STA는 도 1의 부도면 (b)와 같이 변형될 수 있다. 이하 도 1의 부도면 (b)을 기초로, 본 명세서의 STA(110, 120)을 설명한다. The device/STA of the sub-drawing (a) of the above-described Fig. 1 can be modified as in the sub-drawing (b) of Fig. 1. Hereinafter, the STA (110, 120) of the present specification will be described based on the sub-drawing (b) of Fig. 1.

예를 들어, 도 1의 부도면 (b)에 도시된 트랜시버(113, 123)는 상술한 도 1의 부도면 (a)에 도시된 트랜시버와 동일한 기능을 수행할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 도 1의 부도면 (b)에 도시된 프로세싱 칩(114, 124)은 프로세서(111, 121) 및 메모리(112, 122)를 포함할 수 있다. 도 1의 부도면 (b)에 도시된 프로세서(111, 121) 및 메모리(112, 122)는 상술한 도 1의 부도면 (a)에 도시된 프로세서(111, 121) 및 메모리(112, 122)와 동일한 기능을 수행할 수 있다. For example, the transceiver (113, 123) illustrated in sub-drawing (b) of FIG. 1 may perform the same function as the transceiver illustrated in sub-drawing (a) of FIG. 1 described above. For example, the processing chip (114, 124) illustrated in sub-drawing (b) of FIG. 1 may include a processor (111, 121) and a memory (112, 122). The processor (111, 121) and the memory (112, 122) illustrated in sub-drawing (b) of FIG. 1 may perform the same function as the processor (111, 121) and the memory (112, 122) illustrated in sub-drawing (a) of FIG. 1 described above.

이하에서 설명되는, 이동 단말(mobile terminal), 무선 기기(wireless device), 무선 송수신 유닛(Wireless Transmit/Receive Unit; WTRU), 사용자 장비(User Equipment; UE), 이동국(Mobile Station; MS), 이동 가입자 유닛(Mobile Subscriber Unit), 유저(user), 유저 STA, 네트워크, 기지국(Base Station), Node-B, AP(Access Point), 리피터, 라우터, 릴레이, 수신 장치, 송신 장치, 수신 STA, 송신 STA, 수신 Device, 송신 Device, 수신 Apparatus, 및/또는 송신 Apparatus는, 도 1의 부도면 (a)/(b)에 도시된 STA(110, 120)을 의미하거나, 도 1의 부도면 (b)에 도시된 프로세싱 칩(114, 124)을 의미할 수 있다. 즉, 본 명세서의 기술적 특징은, 도 1의 부도면 (a)/(b)에 도시된 STA(110, 120)에 수행될 수도 있고, 도 1의 부도면 (b)에 도시된 프로세싱 칩(114, 124)에서만 수행될 수도 있다. 예를 들어, 송신 STA가 제어 신호를 송신하는 기술적 특징은, 도 1의 부도면 (a)/(b)에 도시된 프로세서(111, 121)에서 생성된 제어 신호가 도 1의 부도면 (a)/(b)에 도시된 트랜시버(113, 123)을 통해 송신되는 기술적 특징으로 이해될 수 있다. 또는, 송신 STA가 제어 신호를 송신하는 기술적 특징은, 도 1의 부도면 (b)에 도시된 프로세싱 칩(114, 124)에서 트랜시버(113, 123)로 전달될 제어 신호가 생성되는 기술적 특징으로 이해될 수 있다. The mobile terminal, the wireless device, the Wireless Transmit/Receive Unit (WTRU), the User Equipment (UE), the Mobile Station (MS), the Mobile Subscriber Unit, the user, the user STA, the network, the Base Station, the Node-B, the Access Point (AP), the repeater, the router, the relay, the receiving device, the transmitting device, the receiving STA, the transmitting STA, the receiving Device, the transmitting Device, the receiving Apparatus, and/or the transmitting Apparatus described below may refer to the STA (110, 120) illustrated in the sub-drawings (a)/(b) of FIG. 1, or may refer to the processing chip (114, 124) illustrated in the sub-drawing (b) of FIG. 1. That is, the technical feature of the present specification may be performed in the STA (110, 120) illustrated in the sub-drawings (a)/(b) of FIG. 1, or may be performed only in the processing chip (114, 124) illustrated in the sub-drawings (b) of FIG. 1. For example, the technical feature that the transmitting STA transmits a control signal may be understood as a technical feature that the control signal generated in the processor (111, 121) illustrated in the sub-drawings (a)/(b) of FIG. 1 is transmitted through the transceiver (113, 123) illustrated in the sub-drawings (a)/(b) of FIG. 1. Alternatively, the technical feature that the transmitting STA transmits a control signal may be understood as a technical feature that the control signal to be transmitted to the transceiver (113, 123) is generated in the processing chip (114, 124) illustrated in the sub-drawings (b) of FIG. 1.

예를 들어, 수신 STA가 제어 신호를 수신하는 기술적 특징은, 도 1의 부도면 (a)에 도시된 트랜시버(113, 123)에 의해 제어 신호가 수신되는 기술적 특징으로 이해될 수 있다. 또는, 수신 STA가 제어 신호를 수신하는 기술적 특징은, 도 1의 부도면 (a)에 도시된 트랜시버(113, 123)에 수신된 제어 신호가 도 1의 부도면 (a)에 도시된 프로세서(111, 121)에 의해 획득되는 기술적 특징으로 이해될 수 있다. 또는, 수신 STA가 제어 신호를 수신하는 기술적 특징은, 도 1의 부도면 (b)에 도시된 트랜시버(113, 123)에 수신된 제어 신호가 도 1의 부도면 (b)에 도시된 프로세싱 칩(114, 124)에 의해 획득되는 기술적 특징으로 이해될 수 있다. For example, a technical feature of a receiving STA receiving a control signal may be understood as a technical feature of a control signal being received by a transceiver (113, 123) illustrated in a sub-drawing (a) of FIG. 1. Alternatively, a technical feature of a receiving STA receiving a control signal may be understood as a technical feature of a control signal received by a transceiver (113, 123) illustrated in a sub-drawing (a) of FIG. 1 being acquired by a processor (111, 121) illustrated in a sub-drawing (a) of FIG. 1. Alternatively, a technical feature of a receiving STA receiving a control signal may be understood as a technical feature of a control signal received by a transceiver (113, 123) illustrated in a sub-drawing (b) of FIG. 1 being acquired by a processing chip (114, 124) illustrated in a sub-drawing (b) of FIG.

도 1의 부도면 (b)을 참조하면, 메모리(112, 122) 내에 소프트웨어 코드(115, 125)가 포함될 수 있다. 소프트웨어 코드(115, 125)는 프로세서(111, 121)의 동작을 제어하는 instruction이 포함될 수 있다. 소프트웨어 코드(115, 125)는 다양한 프로그래밍 언어로 포함될 수 있다. Referring to the sub-drawing (b) of FIG. 1, software code (115, 125) may be included in the memory (112, 122). The software code (115, 125) may include instructions that control the operation of the processor (111, 121). The software code (115, 125) may be included in various programming languages.

도 1에 도시된 프로세서(111, 121) 또는 프로세싱 칩(114, 124)은 ASIC(application-specific integrated circuit), 다른 칩셋, 논리 회로 및/또는 데이터 처리 장치를 포함할 수 있다. 프로세서는 AP(application processor)일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 도 1에 도시된 프로세서(111, 121) 또는 프로세싱 칩(114, 124)은 DSP(digital signal processor), CPU(central processing unit), GPU(graphics processing unit), 모뎀(Modem; modulator and demodulator) 중 적어도 하나를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 도 1에 도시된 프로세서(111, 121) 또는 프로세싱 칩(114, 124)은 Qualcomm®에 의해 제조된 SNAPDRAGON® 시리즈 프로세서, Samsung®에 의해 제조된 EXYNOS® 시리즈 프로세서, Apple®에 의해 제조된 A 시리즈 프로세서, MediaTek®에 의해 제조된 HELIO® 시리즈 프로세서, INTEL®에 의해 제조된 ATOM® 시리즈 프로세서 또는 이를 개선(enhance)한 프로세서일 수 있다. The processor (111, 121) or the processing chip (114, 124) illustrated in FIG. 1 may include an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), another chipset, a logic circuit, and/or a data processing device. The processor may be an application processor (AP). For example, the processor (111, 121) or the processing chip (114, 124) illustrated in FIG. 1 may include at least one of a digital signal processor (DSP), a central processing unit (CPU), a graphics processing unit (GPU), and a modem (modulator and demodulator). For example, the processor (111, 121) or processing chip (114, 124) illustrated in FIG. 1 may be a SNAPDRAGON® series processor manufactured by Qualcomm®, an EXYNOS® series processor manufactured by Samsung®, an A series processor manufactured by Apple®, a HELIO® series processor manufactured by MediaTek®, an ATOM® series processor manufactured by INTEL®, or a processor that enhances these.

본 명세서에서 상향링크는 non-AP STA로부터 AP STA으로의 통신을 위한 링크를 의미할 수 있고 상향링크를 통해 상향링크 PPDU/패킷/신호 등이 송신될 수 있다. 또한, 본 명세서에서 하향링크는 AP STA로부터 non-AP STA으로의 통신을 위한 링크를 의미할 수 있고 하향링크를 통해 하향링크 PPDU/패킷/신호 등이 송신될 수 있다.In this specification, uplink may mean a link for communication from a non-AP STA to an AP STA, and uplink PPDU/packet/signal, etc. may be transmitted through the uplink. In addition, in this specification, downlink may mean a link for communication from an AP STA to a non-AP STA, and downlink PPDU/packet/signal, etc. may be transmitted through the downlink.

도 2는 무선랜(WLAN)의 구조를 나타낸 개념도이다.Figure 2 is a conceptual diagram showing the structure of a wireless local area network (WLAN).

도 2의 상단은 IEEE(institute of electrical and electronic engineers) 802.11의 인프라스트럭쳐 BSS(basic service set)의 구조를 나타낸다.The upper part of Figure 2 shows the structure of the infrastructure BSS (basic service set) of IEEE (institute of electrical and electronic engineers) 802.11.

도 2의 상단을 참조하면, 무선랜 시스템은 하나 또는 그 이상의 인프라스트럭쳐 BSS(200, 205)(이하, BSS)를 포함할 수 있다. BSS(200, 205)는 성공적으로 동기화를 이루어서 서로 통신할 수 있는 AP(access point, 225) 및 STA1(Station, 200-1)과 같은 AP와 STA의 집합으로서, 특정 영역을 가리키는 개념은 아니다. BSS(205)는 하나의 AP(230)에 하나 이상의 결합 가능한 STA(205-1, 205-2)을 포함할 수도 있다.Referring to the top of FIG. 2, the wireless LAN system may include one or more infrastructure BSS (200, 205) (hereinafter, BSS). The BSS (200, 205) is a set of APs and STAs, such as an access point (AP) 225 and a station (STA1, 200-1), which are successfully synchronized and can communicate with each other, and is not a concept referring to a specific area. The BSS (205) may include one or more STAs (205-1, 205-2) that can be associated with one AP (230).

BSS는 적어도 하나의 STA, 분산 서비스(distribution Service)를 제공하는 AP(225, 230) 및 다수의 AP를 연결시키는 분산 시스템(distribution System, DS, 210)을 포함할 수 있다.A BSS may include at least one STA, an AP (225, 230) providing a distribution service, and a distribution system (DS, 210) connecting multiple APs.

분산 시스템(210)은 여러 BSS(200, 205)를 연결하여 확장된 서비스 셋인 ESS(extended service set, 240)를 구현할 수 있다. ESS(240)는 하나 또는 여러 개의 AP가 분산 시스템(210)을 통해 연결되어 이루어진 하나의 네트워크를 indicate하는 용어로 사용될 수 있다. 하나의 ESS(240)에 포함되는 AP는 동일한 SSID(service set identification)를 가질 수 있다.The distributed system (210) can implement an extended service set (ESS, 240) by connecting multiple BSSs (200, 205). The ESS (240) can be used as a term to indicate a network formed by connecting one or more APs through the distributed system (210). APs included in one ESS (240) can have the same SSID (service set identification).

포털(portal, 220)은 무선랜 네트워크(IEEE 802.11)와 다른 네트워크(예를 들어, 802.X)와의 연결을 수행하는 브리지 역할을 수행할 수 있다.The portal (portal, 220) can act as a bridge to connect a wireless LAN network (IEEE 802.11) to another network (e.g., 802.X).

도 2의 상단과 같은 BSS에서는 AP(225, 230) 사이의 네트워크 및 AP(225, 230)와 STA(200-1, 205-1, 205-2) 사이의 네트워크가 구현될 수 있다. 하지만, AP(225, 230)가 없이 STA 사이에서도 네트워크를 설정하여 통신을 수행하는 것도 가능할 수 있다. AP(225, 230)가 없이 STA 사이에서도 네트워크를 설정하여 통신을 수행하는 네트워크를 애드-혹 네트워크(Ad-Hoc network) 또는 독립 BSS(independent basic service set, IBSS)라고 정의한다.In a BSS such as the upper part of Fig. 2, a network between APs (225, 230) and a network between APs (225, 230) and STAs (200-1, 205-1, 205-2) can be implemented. However, it may also be possible to establish a network and perform communication between STAs without an AP (225, 230). A network that establishes a network and performs communication between STAs without an AP (225, 230) is defined as an ad-hoc network or an independent basic service set (IBSS).

도 2의 하단은 IBSS를 나타낸 개념도이다.The bottom of Figure 2 is a conceptual diagram showing IBSS.

도 2의 하단을 참조하면, IBSS는 애드-혹 모드로 동작하는 BSS이다. IBSS는 AP를 포함하지 않기 때문에 중앙에서 관리 기능을 수행하는 개체(centralized management entity)가 없다. 즉, IBSS에서 STA(250-1, 250-2, 250-3, 255-4, 255-5)들은 분산된 방식(distributed manner)으로 관리된다. IBSS에서는 모든 STA(250-1, 250-2, 250-3, 255-4, 255-5)이 이동 STA으로 이루어질 수 있으며, 분산 시스템으로의 접속이 허용되지 않아서 자기 완비적 네트워크(self-contained network)를 이룬다.Referring to the bottom of Fig. 2, IBSS is a BSS operating in ad-hoc mode. Since IBSS does not include AP, there is no centralized management entity. That is, in IBSS, STAs (250-1, 250-2, 250-3, 255-4, 255-5) are managed in a distributed manner. In IBSS, all STAs (250-1, 250-2, 250-3, 255-4, 255-5) can be mobile STAs, and access to the distributed system is not permitted, forming a self-contained network.

도 3은 일반적인 링크 셋업(link setup) 과정을 설명하는 도면이다. Figure 3 is a diagram illustrating a general link setup process.

도시된 S310 단계에서 STA은 네트워크 발견 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 네트워크 발견 동작은 STA의 스캐닝(scanning) 동작을 포함할 수 있다. 즉, STA이 네트워크에 액세스하기 위해서는 참여 가능한 네트워크를 찾아야 한다. STA은 무선 네트워크에 참여하기 전에 호환 가능한 네트워크를 식별하여야 하는데, 특정 영역에 존재하는 네트워크 식별과정을 스캐닝이라고 한다. 스캐닝 방식에는 능동적 스캐닝(active scanning)과 수동적 스캐닝(passive scanning)이 있다.In the illustrated S310 step, the STA may perform a network discovery operation. The network discovery operation may include a scanning operation of the STA. That is, in order for the STA to access the network, it must find a network that it can participate in. The STA must identify a compatible network before participating in the wireless network, and the process of identifying networks existing in a specific area is called scanning. There are two types of scanning methods: active scanning and passive scanning.

도 3에서는 예시적으로 능동적 스캐닝 과정을 포함하는 네트워크 발견 동작을 도시한다. 능동적 스캐닝에서 스캐닝을 수행하는 STA은 채널들을 옮기면서 주변에 어떤 AP가 존재하는지 탐색하기 위해 프로브 요청 프레임(probe request frame)을 전송하고 이에 대한 응답을 기다린다. 응답자(responder)는 프로브 요청 프레임을 전송한 STA에게 프로브 요청 프레임에 대한 응답으로 프로브 응답 프레임(probe response frame)을 전송한다. 여기에서, 응답자는 스캐닝되고 있는 채널의 BSS에서 마지막으로 비콘 프레임(beacon frame)을 전송한 STA일 수 있다. BSS에서는 AP가 비콘 프레임을 전송하므로 AP가 응답자가 되며, IBSS에서는 IBSS 내의 STA들이 돌아가면서 비콘 프레임을 전송하므로 응답자가 일정하지 않다. 예를 들어, 1번 채널에서 프로브 요청 프레임을 전송하고 1번 채널에서 프로브 응답 프레임을 수신한 STA은, 수신한 프로브 응답 프레임에 포함된 BSS 관련 정보를 저장하고 다음 채널(예를 들어, 2번 채널)로 이동하여 동일한 방법으로 스캐닝(즉, 2번 채널 상에서 프로브 요청/응답 송수신)을 수행할 수 있다.FIG. 3 illustrates a network discovery operation including an active scanning process as an example. In active scanning, an STA performing scanning transmits a probe request frame to search for any APs in the vicinity while moving between channels and waits for a response thereto. A responder transmits a probe response frame to an STA that transmitted the probe request frame as a response to the probe request frame. Here, the responder may be an STA that last transmitted a beacon frame in a BSS of the channel being scanned. In a BSS, an AP transmits a beacon frame, so the AP becomes the responder, and in an IBSS, STAs within an IBSS take turns transmitting beacon frames, so the responder is not constant. For example, an STA that transmits a probe request frame on channel 1 and receives a probe response frame on channel 1 can store BSS-related information included in the received probe response frame and move to the next channel (e.g., channel 2) to perform scanning (i.e., transmitting and receiving probe requests/responses on channel 2) in the same manner.

도 3의 일례에는 표시되지 않았지만, 스캐닝 동작은 수동적 스캐닝 방식으로 수행될 수도 있다. 수동적 스캐닝을 기초로 스캐닝을 수행하는 STA은 채널들을 옮기면서 비콘 프레임을 기다릴 수 있다. 비콘 프레임은 IEEE 802.11에서 관리 프레임(management frame) 중 하나로서, 무선 네트워크의 존재를 알리고, 스캐닝을 수행하는 STA으로 하여금 무선 네트워크를 찾아서, 무선 네트워크에 참여할 수 있도록 주기적으로 전송된다. BSS에서 AP가 비콘 프레임을 주기적으로 전송하는 역할을 수행하고, IBSS에서는 IBSS 내의 STA들이 돌아가면서 비콘 프레임을 전송한다. 스캐닝을 수행하는 STA은 비콘 프레임을 수신하면 비콘 프레임에 포함된 BSS에 대한 정보를 저장하고 다른 채널로 이동하면서 각 채널에서 비콘 프레임 정보를 기록한다. 비콘 프레임을 수신한 STA은, 수신한 비콘 프레임에 포함된 BSS 관련 정보를 저장하고 다음 채널로 이동하여 동일한 방법으로 다음 채널에서 스캐닝을 수행할 수 있다.Although not shown in the example of FIG. 3, the scanning operation may also be performed in a passive scanning manner. An STA performing scanning based on passive scanning may wait for a beacon frame while moving between channels. A beacon frame is one of the management frames in IEEE 802.11, and is periodically transmitted to notify the existence of a wireless network and to enable an STA performing scanning to find a wireless network and participate in the wireless network. In a BSS, an AP periodically transmits a beacon frame, and in an IBSS, STAs in the IBSS take turns transmitting beacon frames. When an STA performing scanning receives a beacon frame, it stores information about the BSS included in the beacon frame and moves to another channel, recording beacon frame information in each channel. An STA receiving a beacon frame may store information related to the BSS included in the received beacon frame, move to the next channel, and perform scanning on the next channel in the same manner.

네트워크를 발견한 STA은, 단계 S320를 통해 인증 과정을 수행할 수 있다. 이러한 인증 과정은 후술하는 단계 S340의 보안 셋업 동작과 명확하게 구분하기 위해서 첫 번째 인증(first authentication) 과정이라고 칭할 수 있다. S320의 인증 과정은, STA이 인증 요청 프레임(authentication request frame)을 AP에게 전송하고, 이에 응답하여 AP가 인증 응답 프레임(authentication response frame)을 STA에게 전송하는 과정을 포함할 수 있다. 인증 요청/응답에 사용되는 인증 프레임(authentication frame)은 관리 프레임에 해당한다.An STA that has discovered a network may perform an authentication process through step S320. This authentication process may be referred to as a first authentication process in order to clearly distinguish it from the security setup operation of step S340 described below. The authentication process of S320 may include a process in which the STA transmits an authentication request frame to the AP, and in response, the AP transmits an authentication response frame to the STA. The authentication frame used for the authentication request/response corresponds to a management frame.

인증 프레임은 인증 알고리즘 번호(authentication algorithm number), 인증 트랜잭션 시퀀스 번호(authentication transaction sequence number), 상태 코드(status code), 검문 텍스트(challenge text), RSN(Robust Security Network), 유한 순환 그룹(Finite Cyclic Group) 등에 대한 정보를 포함할 수 있다. The authentication frame may include information such as an authentication algorithm number, an authentication transaction sequence number, a status code, a challenge text, a Robust Security Network (RSN), and a Finite Cyclic Group.

STA은 인증 요청 프레임을 AP에게 전송할 수 있다. AP는 수신된 인증 요청 프레임에 포함된 정보에 기초하여, 해당 STA에 대한 인증을 허용할지 여부를 결정할 수 있다. AP는 인증 처리의 결과를 인증 응답 프레임을 통하여 STA에게 제공할 수 있다.The STA may transmit an authentication request frame to the AP. The AP may determine whether to allow authentication for the STA based on the information included in the received authentication request frame. The AP may provide the result of the authentication processing to the STA through an authentication response frame.

성공적으로 인증된 STA은 단계 S330을 기초로 연결 과정을 수행할 수 있다. 연결 과정은 STA이 연결 요청 프레임(association request frame)을 AP에게 전송하고, 이에 응답하여 AP가 연결 응답 프레임(association response frame)을 STA에게 전송하는 과정을 포함한다. 예를 들어, 연결 요청 프레임은 다양한 능력(capability)에 관련된 정보, 비콘 청취 간격(listen interval), SSID(service set identifier), 지원 레이트(supported rates), 지원 채널(supported channels), RSN, 이동성 도메인, 지원 오퍼레이팅 클래스(supported operating classes), TIM 방송 요청(Traffic Indication Map Broadcast request), 상호동작(interworking) 서비스 능력 등에 대한 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 연결 응답 프레임은 다양한 능력에 관련된 정보, 상태 코드, AID(Association ID), 지원 레이트, EDCA(Enhanced Distributed Channel Access) 파라미터 세트, RCPI(Received Channel Power Indicator), RSNI(Received Signal to Noise Indicator), 이동성 도메인, 타임아웃 간격(연관 컴백 시간(association comeback time)), 중첩(overlapping) BSS 스캔 파라미터, TIM 방송 응답, QoS 맵 등의 정보를 포함할 수 있다.A successfully authenticated STA may perform an association process based on step S330. The association process includes a process in which the STA transmits an association request frame to the AP, and in response, the AP transmits an association response frame to the STA. For example, the association request frame may include information related to various capabilities, a beacon listen interval, a service set identifier (SSID), supported rates, supported channels, RSN, mobility domain, supported operating classes, TIM broadcast request, interworking service capabilities, and the like. For example, the association response frame may contain information related to various capabilities, status codes, Association ID (AID), supported rates, Enhanced Distributed Channel Access (EDCA) parameter sets, Received Channel Power Indicator (RCPI), Received Signal to Noise Indicator (RSNI), mobility domains, timeout interval (association comeback time), overlapping BSS scan parameters, TIM broadcast response, QoS maps, etc.

이후 S340 단계에서, STA은 보안 셋업 과정을 수행할 수 있다. 단계 S340의 보안 셋업 과정은, 예를 들어, EAPOL(Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN) 프레임을 통한 4-웨이(way) 핸드쉐이킹을 통해서, 프라이빗 키 셋업(private key setup)을 하는 과정을 포함할 수 있다.In step S340, the STA may perform a security setup process. The security setup process of step S340 may include a process of performing private key setup, for example, through 4-way handshaking via an Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) frame.

도 4는 멀티 링크(Multi-link; ML)의 일 실시예를 설명한다. Figure 4 illustrates one embodiment of multi-link (ML).

도 4에 도시된 바와 같이 복수의 MLD(multi-link device)가 멀리 링크를 통해 통신을 수행할 수 있다. 상기 MLD는 복수의 AP STA을 포함하는 AP MLD와 복수의 non-AP STA을 포함하는 non-AP MLD로 분류될 수 있다. 즉 AP MLD는 연계된(affiliated) AP(즉, AP STA)들을 포함할 수 있고, non-AP MLD는 연계된(affiliated) STA(즉, non-AP STA, 또는 user-STA)들을 포함할 수 있다. As illustrated in FIG. 4, a plurality of multi-link devices (MLDs) can perform communication over a remote link. The MLDs can be classified into an AP MLD including a plurality of AP STAs and a non-AP MLD including a plurality of non-AP STAs. That is, the AP MLD can include affiliated APs (i.e., AP STAs), and the non-AP MLD can include affiliated STAs (i.e., non-AP STAs, or user-STAs).

멀티링크는 제1 링크와 제2 링크를 포함할 수 있고, 상기 제1 및 제2 링크에는 서로 다른 채널/서브채널/주파수자원이 할당될 수 있다. 상기 제1 및 제2 멀티링크는 4비트 길이(또는 기타 n 비트 길이)의 링크 ID를 통해 식별될 수 있다. 상기 제1 및 제2 링크는 동일한 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, 또는 6 GHz 밴드에 구성될 수 있다. 또는 상기 제1 링크 및 링크는 서로 다른 밴드에 구성될 수 있다. A multilink may include a first link and a second link, and different channels/subchannels/frequency resources may be allocated to the first and second links. The first and second multilinks may be identified through a link ID of 4 bits in length (or other n bits in length). The first and second links may be configured in the same 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, or 6 GHz band. Alternatively, the first link and the link may be configured in different bands.

도 4의 AP MLD는 3개의 연계된 AP들(three affiliated APs)을 포함한다. 도 4의 일례에서, AP1이 2.4 GHz 밴드에서 동작(operate)하고, AP2는 5 GHz 밴드에서 동작하고, AP3은 6 GHz 밴드에서 동작할 수 있다. 도 4의 일례에서 AP1과 non-AP1이 동작하는 제1 링크는 2.4 GHz 밴드 내의 채널/서브채널/주파수자원으로 정의될 수 있다. 또한, 도 4의 일례에서 AP2와 non-AP2가 동작하는 제2 링크는 5 GHz 밴드 내의 채널/서브채널/주파수자원으로 정의될 수 있다. 또한, 도 4의 일례에서 AP3과 non-AP3이 동작하는 제3 링크는 6 GHz 밴드 내의 채널/서브채널/주파수자원으로 정의될 수 있다. The AP MLD of FIG. 4 includes three affiliated APs. In the example of FIG. 4, AP1 may operate in a 2.4 GHz band, AP2 may operate in a 5 GHz band, and AP3 may operate in a 6 GHz band. In the example of FIG. 4, a first link in which AP1 and non-AP1 operate may be defined by channel/subchannel/frequency resources within the 2.4 GHz band. In addition, a second link in the example of FIG. 4 in which AP2 and non-AP2 operate may be defined by channel/subchannel/frequency resources within the 5 GHz band. In addition, a third link in the example of FIG. 4 in which AP3 and non-AP3 operate may be defined by channel/subchannel/frequency resources within the 6 GHz band.

도 4의 일례에서 AP1은 non-AP STA1로 Association Request frame를 송신하는 방식으로 멀티링크 셋업 절차(ML setup procedure)를 시작할 수 있다. 도 4의 일례에서 non-AP STA1은 상기 Association Request frame에 대한 응답으로 Association Response frame을 송신할 수 있다. 도 4에 도시된 각각의 AP(예를 들어, AP1/2/3)는 도 1 및/또는 도 2에 도시된 AP와 동일할 수 있고, 도 4에 도시된 각각의 non-AP(예를 들어, non-AP1/2/3)는 도 1 및/또는 도 2에 도시된 STA(즉, user-STA 또는 non-AP STA)와 동일할 수 있다. In the example of FIG. 4, AP1 can start a multilink setup procedure (ML setup procedure) by transmitting an Association Request frame to non-AP STA1. In the example of FIG. 4, non-AP STA1 can transmit an Association Response frame in response to the Association Request frame. Each AP (e.g., AP1/2/3) illustrated in FIG. 4 may be identical to the AP illustrated in FIG. 1 and/or FIG. 2, and each non-AP (e.g., non-AP1/2/3) illustrated in FIG. 4 may be identical to a STA (i.e., user-STA or non-AP STA) illustrated in FIG. 1 and/or FIG. 2.

본 명세서의 구체적인 특징은 도 4의 구체적인 특징에 제한되지 않는다. 즉 링크의 개수는 다양하게 정의될 수 있고, 복수의 링크는 적어도 하나의 밴드 내에서 다양하게 정의될 수 있다.The specific features of this specification are not limited to the specific features of Fig. 4. That is, the number of links can be variously defined, and multiple links can be variously defined within at least one band.

도 5는 본 명세서의 STA에서 송신/수신되는 PPDU(physical protocol data unit 또는 physical layer (PHY) protocol data unit)가 설명된다.Figure 5 illustrates a PPDU (physical protocol data unit or physical layer (PHY) protocol data unit) transmitted/received by an STA of this specification.

본 명세서의 STA(예를 들어, AP STA, non-AP STA, AP MLD, non-AP MLD)는 도 5의 PPDU를 송신 및/또는 수신할 수 있다. 본 명세서에서 설명되는 PPDU는 예를 들어 도 5의 구조를 가질 수 있다. 또한 본 명세서에서 설명되는 PPDU는 UHR(Ultra High Reliability) PPDU는 송신 PPDU, 수신 PPDU, 제1 타입 또는 제N 타입 PPDU 등의 다양한 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다. 본 명세서에서 설명되는 PPDU는 IEEE 802.11bn에 따라 정의되는 WLAN 시스템 및/또는 IEEE 802.11bn을 개선하는 차세대 WLAN 시스템에서 사용될 수 있다. The STA (e.g., AP STA, non-AP STA, AP MLD, non-AP MLD) of the present specification can transmit and/or receive the PPDU of FIG. 5. The PPDU described in the present specification can have, for example, the structure of FIG. 5. In addition, the PPDU described in the present specification can be called by various names such as UHR (Ultra High Reliability) PPDU, transmission PPDU, reception PPDU, first type or Nth type PPDU, etc. The PPDU described in the present specification can be used in a WLAN system defined according to IEEE 802.11bn and/or a next-generation WLAN system that improves IEEE 802.11bn.

도 5의 PPDU는 UHR 시스템에서 사용되는 다양한 PPDU 타입에 관련될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 도 5의 일례는 SU(single-user) 모드/타입/transmission, MU(multi-user) 모드/타입/transmission, 및 채널 사운딩에 관련된 NDP(null data packet) 모드/타입/transmission 중 적어도 어느 하나를 위해 사용될 수 있다. 예를 들어 도 5의 일례가 NDP에 관련되는 경우 도시된 Data 필드가 생략될 수 있다. 도 5의 PPDU가 TB(Trigger-based) 모드를 위해 사용되는 경우, 도 5의 UHR-SIG는 생략될 수 있다. 달리 표현하면 UL-MU(Uplink-MU) 통신을 위한 Trigger frame을 수신한 STA은, 도 5의 일례에서 UHR-SIG가 생략된 PPDU를 송신할 수 있다. The PPDU of FIG. 5 may relate to various PPDU types used in a UHR system. For example, the example of FIG. 5 may be used for at least one of a SU (single-user) mode/type/transmission, a MU (multi-user) mode/type/transmission, and a NDP (null data packet) mode/type/transmission related to channel sounding. For example, if the example of FIG. 5 relates to NDP, the Data field illustrated may be omitted. If the PPDU of FIG. 5 is used for a TB (Trigger-based) mode, the UHR-SIG of FIG. 5 may be omitted. In other words, an STA that has received a Trigger frame for UL-MU (Uplink-MU) communication may transmit a PPDU with the UHR-SIG omitted in the example of FIG. 5.

도 5에서 L-STF 내지 UHR-LTF는 프리앰블(preamble) 또는 물리 프리앰블(physical preamble)로 불릴 수 있고, (송신/수신 STA에 포함되는) 물리계층에서 생성/송신/수신/획득/디코딩될 수 있다.In Fig. 5, L-STF to UHR-LTF may be called a preamble or a physical preamble, and may be generated/transmitted/received/acquired/decoded in the physical layer (included in the transmitting/receiving STA).

도 5에 도시된 각각의 블록은 필드/서브필드/신호 등으로 불릴 수 있다. 이러한 필드/서브필드/신호의 명칭은, 도 5에 도시된 바와 같이, L-STF(legacy short training field), L-LTF(legacy long training field), L-SIG(legacy signal), RL-SIG(repeated L-SIG), U-SIG(Universal Signal), UHR-SIG(UHR-signal) 등이 될 수 있다. Each block illustrated in FIG. 5 may be called a field/subfield/signal, etc. The names of these fields/subfields/signals may be, as illustrated in FIG. 5, L-STF (legacy short training field), L-LTF (legacy long training field), L-SIG (legacy signal), RL-SIG (repeated L-SIG), U-SIG (Universal Signal), UHR-SIG (UHR-signal), etc.

도 5의 L-STF, L-LTF, L-SIG, RL-SIG, U-SIG, UHR-SIG 필드의 subcarrier spacing은 312.5 kHz로 정해지고, UHR-STF, UHR-LTF, Data 필드의 subcarrier spacing은 78.125 kHz로 정해질 수 있다. 즉, L-STF, L-LTF, L-SIG, RL-SIG, U-SIG, UHR-SIG 필드의 tone index(또는 subcarrier index)는 312.5 kHz 단위로 표시되고, UHR-STF, UHR-LTF, Data 필드의 tone index(또는 subcarrier index)는 78.125 kHz 단위로 표시될 수 있다.The subcarrier spacing of the L-STF, L-LTF, L-SIG, RL-SIG, U-SIG, and UHR-SIG fields of FIG. 5 may be set to 312.5 kHz, and the subcarrier spacing of the UHR-STF, UHR-LTF, and Data fields may be set to 78.125 kHz. That is, the tone index (or subcarrier index) of the L-STF, L-LTF, L-SIG, RL-SIG, U-SIG, and UHR-SIG fields may be expressed in units of 312.5 kHz, and the tone index (or subcarrier index) of the UHR-STF, UHR-LTF, and Data fields may be expressed in units of 78.125 kHz.

도 5의 PPDU는 L-LTF 및 L-STF는 종래의 필드(예를 들어, 종래의 WLAN 표준에 정의되는 non-HT LTF 및 non-HT STF)와 동일할 수 있다.In the PPDU of Fig. 5, L-LTF and L-STF can be identical to conventional fields (e.g., non-HT LTF and non-HT STF defined in conventional WLAN standards).

도 5의 L-SIG 필드는 예를 들어 24 비트의 비트 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 24비트 정보는 4 비트의 Rate 필드, 1 비트의 Reserved 비트, 12 비트의 Length 필드, 1 비트의 Parity 비트 및, 6 비트의 Tail 비트를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 12 비트의 Length 필드는 PPDU의 길이 또는 time duration에 관한 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 12비트 Length 필드의 값은 PPDU의 타입을 기초로 결정될 수 있다. 예를 들어, PPDU가 non-HT(non-High Throughput), HT(High Throughput), VHT(Very High Throughput) PPDU이거나 EHT(extremely high throughput) PPDU, UHR PPDU인 경우, Length 필드의 값은 3의 배수로 결정될 수 있다. 예를 들어, PPDU가 HE PPDU인 경우, Length 필드의 값은 "3의 배수 + 1" 또는 "3의 배수 +2"로 결정될 수 있다. 달리 표현하면, non-HT, HT, VHT PPDU이거나 EHT PPDU, UHR PPDU를 위해 Length 필드의 값은 3의 배수로 결정될 수 있고, HE(High Efficiency) PPDU를 위해 Length 필드의 값은 "3의 배수 + 1" 또는 "3의 배수 +2"로 결정될 수 있다. 달리 표현하면 UHR PPDU의 Length 필드는 길이를 3으로 나눴을 때 나머지가 0이라는 조건을 만족하는 값으로 설정(The LENGTH field in an UHR PPDU is set to a value satisfying the condition that the remainder is zero when LENGTH is divided by 3)된다. The L-SIG field of FIG. 5 may include, for example, 24 bits of bit information. For example, the 24 bits of information may include a 4 bit Rate field, a 1 bit Reserved bit, a 12 bit Length field, a 1 bit Parity bit, and a 6 bit Tail bit. For example, the 12 bit Length field may include information about the length or time duration of the PPDU. For example, the value of the 12 bit Length field may be determined based on the type of the PPDU. For example, if the PPDU is a non-HT (non-High Throughput), HT (High Throughput), VHT (Very High Throughput) PPDU, or an EHT (extremely high throughput) PPDU, a UHR PPDU, the value of the Length field may be determined as a multiple of 3. For example, if the PPDU is a HE PPDU, the value of the Length field may be determined as "a multiple of 3 + 1" or "a multiple of 3 + 2". In other words, for non-HT, HT, VHT PPDU, EHT PPDU, UHR PPDU, the value of the Length field can be determined as a multiple of 3, and for HE (High Efficiency) PPDU, the value of the Length field can be determined as "a multiple of 3 + 1" or "a multiple of 3 + 2". In other words, the LENGTH field in an UHR PPDU is set to a value satisfying the condition that the remainder is zero when LENGTH is divided by 3.

예를 들어, (non-AP 및 AP) STA은 L-SIG 필드의 24 비트 정보에 대해 1/2의 부호화율(code rate)에 기초한 BCC 인코딩을 적용할 수 있다. 이후 송신 STA은 48 비트의 BCC 부호화 비트를 획득할 수 있다. 48 비트의 부호화 비트에 대해서는 BPSK 변조가 적용되어 48 개의 BPSK 심볼이 생성될 수 있다. 송신 STA은 48개의 BPSK 심볼을, 파일럿 서브캐리어{서브캐리어 인덱스 -21, -7, +7, +21} 및 DC 서브캐리어{서브캐리어 인덱스 0}를 제외한 위치에 매핑할 수 있다. 결과적으로 48개의 BPSK 심볼은 서브캐리어 인덱스 -26 내지 -22, -20 내지 -8, -6 내지 -1, +1 내지 +6, +8 내지 +20, 및 +22 내지 +26에 매핑될 수 있다. 송신 STA은 서브캐리어 인덱스 {-28, -27, +27, +28}에 {-1, -1, -1, 1}의 신호를 추가로 매핑할 수 있다. 위의 신호는 {-28, -27, +27, +28}에 상응하는 주파수 영역에 대한 채널 추정을 위해 사용될 수 있다.For example, the (non-AP and AP) STA can apply BCC encoding based on a code rate of 1/2 to the 24 bits of information in the L-SIG field. Then, the transmitting STA can obtain 48 bits of BCC coding bits. BPSK modulation can be applied to the 48 bits of coding bits to generate 48 BPSK symbols. The transmitting STA can map the 48 BPSK symbols to positions excluding the pilot subcarriers {subcarrier index -21, -7, +7, +21} and the DC subcarrier {subcarrier index 0}. As a result, the 48 BPSK symbols can be mapped to subcarrier indices -26 to -22, -20 to -8, -6 to -1, +1 to +6, +8 to +20, and +22 to +26. The transmitting STA can additionally map the signal of {-1, -1, -1, 1} to the subcarrier indices {-28, -27, +27, +28}. The above signal can be used for channel estimation for the frequency domain corresponding to {-28, -27, +27, +28}.

예를 들어, (non-AP 및 AP) STA은 L-SIG와 동일하게 생성되는 RL-SIG를 생성할 수 있다. RL-SIG에 대해서는 BPSK 변조가 적용될 수 있다. 수신 (non-AP 및 AP) STA은 RL-SIG의 존재를 기초로 수신 PPDU가 HE PPDU, EHT PPDU, UHR PPDU임을 알 수 있다. 달리 표현하면 수신 (non-AP 및 AP) STA은 RL-SIG가 존재하는 경우, 수신 PPDU가 HE PPDU, EHT PPDU, UHR PPDU 중 어느 하나임을 알 수 있다. 달리 표현하면 수신 (non-AP 및 AP) STA은 RL-SIG가 존재하지 않는 경우, 수신 PPDU가 non-HT PPDU, HT PPDU, VHT PPDU 중 어느 하나임을 알 수 있다. 달리 표현하면, RL-SIG 필드는 L-SIG 필드의 반복으로, UHR PPDU를 비-HT PPDU, HT PPDU 및 VHT PPDU와 구분하는 데 사용된다(The RL-SIG field is a repeat of the L-SIG field and is used to differentiate an UHR PPDU from a non-HT PPDU, HT PPDU, and VHT PPDU.).For example, (non-AP and AP) STA can generate RL-SIG, which is generated in the same manner as L-SIG. BPSK modulation can be applied to RL-SIG. The receiving (non-AP and AP) STA can determine that the received PPDU is a HE PPDU, an EHT PPDU, or a UHR PPDU based on the presence of RL-SIG. In other words, the receiving (non-AP and AP) STA can determine that the received PPDU is one of the HE PPDU, EHT PPDU, or UHR PPDU if RL-SIG is present. In other words, the receiving (non-AP and AP) STA can determine that the received PPDU is one of the non-HT PPDU, HT PPDU, or VHT PPDU if RL-SIG is not present. In other words, the RL-SIG field is a repeat of the L-SIG field and is used to differentiate an UHR PPDU from a non-HT PPDU, HT PPDU, and VHT PPDU.

도 5의 RL-SIG 이후에는 U-SIG(Universal SIG)가 삽입될 수 있다. U-SIG는 제1 SIG 필드, 제1 SIG, 제1 타입 SIG, 제어 시그널, 제어 시그널 필드, 제1 (타입) 제어 시그널, 공통 제어 필드, 공통 제어 시그널 등의 다양한 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다. After RL-SIG in Fig. 5, U-SIG (Universal SIG) may be inserted. U-SIG may be called by various names such as first SIG field, first SIG, first type SIG, control signal, control signal field, first (type) control signal, common control field, common control signal, etc.

U-SIG는 N 비트의 정보를 포함할 수 있고, EHT PPDU의 타입을 식별하기 위한 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, U-SIG는 2개의 심볼(예를 들어, 연속하는 2 개의 OFDM 심볼)을 기초로 구성될 수 있다. U-SIG를 위한 각 심볼(예를 들어, OFDM 심볼)은 4 us의 duration을 가질 수 있다. U-SIG의 각 심볼은 26 비트 정보를 송신하기 위해 사용될 수 있다. 예를 들어 U-SIG의 각 심볼은 52개의 데이터 톤과 4 개의 파일럿 톤을 기초로 송수신될 수 있다. The U-SIG can contain N bits of information and can contain information for identifying the type of the EHT PPDU. For example, the U-SIG can be formed based on two symbols (e.g., two consecutive OFDM symbols). Each symbol (e.g., OFDM symbol) for the U-SIG can have a duration of 4 us. Each symbol of the U-SIG can be used to transmit 26 bits of information. For example, each symbol of the U-SIG can be transmitted and received based on 52 data tones and 4 pilot tones.

U-SIG를 통해서는 예를 들어 A 비트 정보(예를 들어, 52 un-coded bit)가 송신될 수 있고, U-SIG의 제1 심볼은 총 A 비트 정보 중 처음 X 비트 정보(예를 들어, 26 un-coded bit)를 송신하고, U-SIG의 제2 심볼은 총 A 비트 정보 중 나머지 Y 비트 정보(예를 들어, 26 un-coded bit)를 송신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 송신 STA은 각 U-SIG 심볼에 포함되는 26 un-coded bit를 획득할 수 있다. 송신 STA은 R=1/2의 rate를 기초로 convolutional encoding(즉, BCC 인코딩)을 수행하여 52-coded bit를 생성하고, 52-coded bit에 대한 인터리빙을 수행할 수 있다. 송신 STA은 인터리빙된 52-coded bit에 대해 BPSK 변조를 수행하여 각 U-SIG 심볼에 할당되는 52개의 BPSK 심볼을 생성할 수 있다. 하나의 U-SIG 심볼은 DC 인덱스 0을 제외하고, 서브캐리어 인덱스 -28부터 서브캐리어 인덱스 +28까지의 56개 톤(서브캐리어)을 기초로 송신될 수 있다. 송신 STA이 생성한 52개의 BPSK 심볼은 파일럿 톤인 -21, -7, +7, +21 톤을 제외한 나머지 톤(서브캐리어)를 기초로 송신될 수 있다. Through U-SIG, for example, A bit information (e.g., 52 un-coded bits) can be transmitted, and the first symbol of U-SIG can transmit the first X bits of information (e.g., 26 un-coded bits) out of the total A bit information, and the second symbol of U-SIG can transmit the remaining Y bits of information (e.g., 26 un-coded bits) out of the total A bit information. For example, the transmitting STA can obtain 26 un-coded bits included in each U-SIG symbol. The transmitting STA can perform convolutional encoding (i.e., BCC encoding) based on a rate of R=1/2 to generate 52-coded bits, and perform interleaving on the 52-coded bits. The transmitting STA can perform BPSK modulation on the interleaved 52-coded bits to generate 52 BPSK symbols allocated to each U-SIG symbol. A single U-SIG symbol can be transmitted based on 56 tones (subcarriers) from subcarrier index -28 to subcarrier index +28, excluding DC index 0. The 52 BPSK symbols generated by the transmitting STA can be transmitted based on the remaining tones (subcarriers) excluding the pilot tones -21, -7, +7, and +21.

예를 들어, U-SIG에 의해 송신되는 A 비트 정보(예를 들어, 52 un-coded bit)는 CRC 필드(예를 들어 4비트 길이의 필드) 및 테일 필드(예를 들어 6비트 길이의 필드)를 포함할 수 있다. 상기 CRC 필드 및 테일 필드는 U-SIG의 제2 심볼을 통해 송신될 수 있다. 상기 CRC 필드는 U-SIG의 제1 심볼에 할당되는 26 비트와 제2 심볼 내에서 상기 CRC/테일 필드를 제외한 나머지 16 비트를 기초로 생성될 수 있고, 종래의 CRC calculation 알고리즘을 기초로 생성될 수 있다. 또한, 상기 테일 필드는 convolutional decoder의 trellis를 terminate하기 위해 사용될 수 있고, 예를 들어 "000000"으로 설정될 수 있다. For example, A bit information (e.g., 52 un-coded bits) transmitted by U-SIG may include a CRC field (e.g., a 4-bit long field) and a tail field (e.g., a 6-bit long field). The CRC field and the tail field may be transmitted through a second symbol of the U-SIG. The CRC field may be generated based on 26 bits allocated to the first symbol of the U-SIG and the remaining 16 bits excluding the CRC/tail field within the second symbol, and may be generated based on a conventional CRC calculation algorithm. In addition, the tail field may be used to terminate a trellis of a convolutional decoder and may be set to, for example, "000000".

U-SIG(또는 U-SIG 필드)에 의해 송신되는 A 비트 정보(예를 들어, 52 un-coded bit)는 version-independent bits와 version-dependent bits로 구분될 수 있다. 예를 들어, version-independent bits의 크기는 고정적이거나 가변적일 수 있다. 예를 들어, version-independent bits는 U-SIG의 제1 심볼에만 할당되거나, version-independent bits는 U-SIG의 제1 심볼 및 제2 심볼 모두에 할당될 수 있다. 예를 들어, version-independent bits와 version-dependent bits는 제1 제어 비트 및 제2 제어 비트 등의 다양한 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다. A bit information (e.g., 52 uncoded bits) transmitted by U-SIG (or U-SIG field) can be divided into version-independent bits and version-dependent bits. For example, the size of version-independent bits can be fixed or variable. For example, version-independent bits can be assigned only to the first symbol of U-SIG, or version-independent bits can be assigned to both the first symbol and the second symbol of U-SIG. For example, version-independent bits and version-dependent bits can be called by various names, such as first control bit and second control bit.

예를 들어, U-SIG의 version-independent bits는 3비트의 PHY version identifier를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 3비트의 PHY version identifier는 송수신 PPDU의 PHY version에 관련된 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 3비트의 PHY version identifier의 제1 값(예를 들어, 000 값)은 송수신 PPDU가 EHT PPDU임을 indicate할 수 있다. 또한, 3비트의 PHY version identifier의 제2 값(예를 들어, 001 값)은 송수신 PPDU가 UHR PPDU임을 indicate할 수 있다.For example, the version-independent bits of U-SIG may include a 3-bit PHY version identifier. For example, the 3-bit PHY version identifier may include information related to the PHY version of a transmitted/received PPDU. For example, a first value (e.g., a value of 000) of the 3-bit PHY version identifier may indicate that the transmitted/received PPDU is an EHT PPDU. Additionally, a second value (e.g., a value of 001) of the 3-bit PHY version identifier may indicate that the transmitted/received PPDU is a UHR PPDU.

달리 표현하면, (AP/non-AP) STA은 EHT PPDU를 송신하는 경우, 3비트의 PHY version identifier를 제1 값으로 설정할 수 있다. 달리 표현하면, 수신 (AP/non-AP) STA은 제1 값을 가지는 PHY version identifier를 기초로, 수신 PPDU가 EHT PPDU임을 판단할 수 있고, 제2 값을 가지는 PHY version identifier를 기초로, 수신 PPDU가 UHR PPDU임을 판단할 수 있다.In other words, when the (AP/non-AP) STA transmits an EHT PPDU, the 3-bit PHY version identifier can be set to the first value. In other words, the receiving (AP/non-AP) STA can determine that the received PPDU is an EHT PPDU based on the PHY version identifier having the first value, and can determine that the received PPDU is a UHR PPDU based on the PHY version identifier having the second value.

예를 들어, U-SIG의 version-independent bits는 1비트의 UL/DL flag 필드를 포함할 수 있다. 1비트의 UL/DL flag 필드의 제1 값은 UL 통신에 관련되고, UL/DL flag 필드의 제2 값은 DL 통신에 관련된다. For example, the version-independent bits of U-SIG may include a 1-bit UL/DL flag field. The first value of the 1-bit UL/DL flag field relates to UL communication, and the second value of the UL/DL flag field relates to DL communication.

예를 들어, U-SIG의 version-independent bits는 TXOP의 길이에 관한 정보, BSS color ID에 관한 정보를 포함할 수 있다.For example, the version-independent bits of U-SIG may include information about the length of the TXOP and information about the BSS color ID.

예를 들어 UHR PPDU가 다양한 타입(예를 들어, (UL 또는 DL을 기반으로 수행되는) SU transmission에 관련된 type, DL transmission에 관련된 type, NDP transmission에 관련된 type, DL non-MU-MIMO에 관련된 type, DL MU-MIMO에 관련된 type, Multi-AP operation에 관련된 type, CBF(Coordinated beamforming), SR(Spatial Reuse)에 관련된 type, C-OFDMA (Coordinated OFDMA)에 관련된 type, C-TDMA (Coordinated TDMA)에 관련된 type)으로 구분되는 경우, EHT PPDU의 타입에 관한 정보(예를 들어, 2비트 또는 3비트 정보)는 U-SIG의 version-dependent bits에 포함될 수 있다. For example, if a UHR PPDU is classified into various types (e.g., type related to SU transmission (performed based on UL or DL), type related to DL transmission, type related to NDP transmission, type related to DL non-MU-MIMO, type related to DL MU-MIMO, type related to Multi-AP operation, type related to CBF (Coordinated beamforming), SR (Spatial Reuse), type related to C-OFDMA (Coordinated OFDMA), type related to C-TDMA (Coordinated TDMA)), information about the type of the EHT PPDU (e.g., 2-bit or 3-bit information) can be included in the version-dependent bits of the U-SIG.

예를 들어, U-SIG는 1) 대역폭에 관한 정보를 포함하는 대역폭 필드, 2) UHR-SIG에 적용되는 MCS(Modulation and Coding Scheme) 기법에 관한 정보를 포함하는 필드, 3) UHR -SIG에 듀얼 서브캐리어 모듈레이션(dual subcarrier modulation, DCM) 기법이 적용되는지 여부에 관련된 정보를 포함하는 indication 필드, 4) UHR -SIG를 위해 사용되는 심볼의 개수에 관한 정보를 포함하는 필드, 5) UHR -SIG가 전 대역에 걸쳐 생성되는지 여부에 관한 정보를 포함하는 필드, 6) UHR -LTF/STF의 타입에 관한 정보를 포함하는 필드, 7) UHR -LTF의 길이 및 CP 길이를 indicate하는 필드에 관한 정보를 포함할 수 있다.For example, U-SIG may include 1) a bandwidth field including information about bandwidth, 2) a field including information about a Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) technique applied to UHR-SIG, 3) an indication field including information about whether a dual subcarrier modulation (DCM) technique is applied to UHR-SIG, 4) a field including information about the number of symbols used for UHR-SIG, 5) a field including information about whether UHR-SIG is generated over the full band, 6) a field including information about the type of UHR-LTF/STF, and 7) a field indicating the length of UHR-LTF and the CP length.

도 5의 PPDU에는 프리앰블 펑처링(puncturing)이 적용될 수 있다. 프리앰블 펑처링은 PPDU의 전체 대역 중에서 일부 대역(예를 들어, Secondary 20 MHz 대역)을 펑처링을 적용하는 것을 의미한다. 예를 들어, 80 MHz PPDU가 송신되는 경우, STA은 80 MHz 대역 중 secondary 20 MHz 대역에 대해 펑처링을 적용하고, primary 20 MHz 대역과 secondary 40 MHz 대역을 통해서만 PPDU를 송신할 수 있다. Preamble puncturing can be applied to the PPDU of FIG. 5. Preamble puncturing means applying puncturing to a portion of the entire band of the PPDU (e.g., the secondary 20 MHz band). For example, when an 80 MHz PPDU is transmitted, the STA can apply puncturing to the secondary 20 MHz band among the 80 MHz band, and transmit the PPDU only through the primary 20 MHz band and the secondary 40 MHz band.

예를 들어 프리앰블 펑처링의 패턴은 사전에 설정될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제1 펑처링 패턴이 적용되는 경우, 80 MHz 대역 내에서 secondary 20 MHz 대역에 대해서만 펑처링이 적용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제2 펑처링 패턴이 적용되는 경우, 80 MHz 대역 내에서 secondary 40 MHz 대역에 포함된 2개의 secondary 20 MHz 대역 중 어느 하나에 대해서만 펑처링이 적용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제3 펑처링 패턴이 적용되는 경우, 160 MHz 대역(또는 80+80 MHz 대역) 내에서 primary 80 MHz 대역에 포함된 secondary 20 MHz 대역에 대해서만 펑처링이 적용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제4 펑처링 패턴이 적용되는 경우, 160 MHz 대역(또는 80+80 MHz 대역) 내에서 primary 80 MHz 대역에 포함된 primary 40 MHz 대역은 존재(present)하고 primary 40 MHz 대역에 속하지 않는 적어도 하나의 20 MHz 채널에 대해 펑처링이 적용될 수 있다. For example, the pattern of preamble puncturing can be set in advance. For example, when the first puncturing pattern is applied, puncturing can be applied only to a secondary 20 MHz band within an 80 MHz band. For example, when the second puncturing pattern is applied, puncturing can be applied only to one of two secondary 20 MHz bands included in a secondary 40 MHz band within an 80 MHz band. For example, when the third puncturing pattern is applied, puncturing can be applied only to a secondary 20 MHz band included in a primary 80 MHz band within a 160 MHz band (or 80+80 MHz band). For example, when the fourth puncturing pattern is applied, a primary 40 MHz band included in the primary 80 MHz band within the 160 MHz band (or 80+80 MHz band) is present, and puncturing can be applied to at least one 20 MHz channel that does not belong to the primary 40 MHz band.

PPDU에 적용되는 프리앰블 펑처링에 관한 정보는 U-SIG 및/또는 UHR-SIG에 포함될 수 있다. 예를 들어, U-SIG의 제1 필드는 PPDU의 연속하는 대역폭(contiguous bandwidth)에 관한 정보를 포함하고, U-SIG의 제2 필드는 PPDU에 적용되는 프리앰블 펑처링에 관한 정보를 포함할 수 있다. Information about preamble puncturing applied to the PPDU may be included in the U-SIG and/or UHR-SIG. For example, a first field of the U-SIG may include information about a contiguous bandwidth of the PPDU, and a second field of the U-SIG may include information about preamble puncturing applied to the PPDU.

예를 들어, U-SIG 및 UHR-SIG는 아래의 방법을 기초로 프리앰블 펑처링에 관한 정보를 포함할 수 있다. PPDU의 대역폭이 80 MHz를 초과하는 경우, U-SIG는 80 MHz 단위로 개별적으로 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, PPDU의 대역폭이 160 MHz인 경우, 해당 PPDU에는 첫 번째 80 MHz 대역을 위한 제1 U-SIG 및 두 번째 80 MHz 대역을 위한 제2 U-SIG가 포함될 수 있다. 이 경우, 제1 U-SIG의 제1 필드는 160 MHz 대역폭에 관한 정보를 포함하고, 제1 U-SIG의 제2 필드는 첫 번째 80 MHz 대역에 적용된 프리앰블 펑처링에 관한 정보(즉, 프리앰블 펑처링 패턴에 관한 정보)를 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 제2 U-SIG의 제1 필드는 160 MHz 대역폭에 관한 정보를 포함하고, 제2 U-SIG의 제2 필드는 두 번째 80 MHz 대역에 적용된 프리앰블 펑처링에 관한 정보(즉, 프리앰블 펑처링 패턴에 관한 정보)를 포함할 수 있다. 한편, 제1 U-SIG에 연속하는 UHR-SIG는 두 번째 80 MHz 대역에 적용된 프리앰블 펑처링에 관한 정보(즉, 프리앰블 펑처링 패턴에 관한 정보)를 포함할 수 있고, 제2 U-SIG에 연속하는 UHR-SIG는 첫 번째 80 MHz 대역에 적용된 프리앰블 펑처링에 관한 정보(즉, 프리앰블 펑처링 패턴에 관한 정보)를 포함할 수 있다. For example, U-SIG and UHR-SIG may include information regarding preamble puncturing based on the following method. If the bandwidth of the PPDU exceeds 80 MHz, U-SIGs may be individually configured in units of 80 MHz. For example, if the bandwidth of the PPDU is 160 MHz, the PPDU may include a first U-SIG for a first 80 MHz band and a second U-SIG for a second 80 MHz band. In this case, the first field of the first U-SIG may include information regarding the 160 MHz bandwidth, and the second field of the first U-SIG may include information regarding preamble puncturing applied to the first 80 MHz band (i.e., information regarding a preamble puncturing pattern). Additionally, the first field of the second U-SIG may include information about a 160 MHz bandwidth, and the second field of the second U-SIG may include information about preamble puncturing applied to the second 80 MHz band (i.e., information about a preamble puncturing pattern). Meanwhile, the UHR-SIG continuous to the first U-SIG may include information about preamble puncturing applied to the second 80 MHz band (i.e., information about a preamble puncturing pattern), and the UHR-SIG continuous to the second U-SIG may include information about preamble puncturing applied to the first 80 MHz band (i.e., information about a preamble puncturing pattern).

추가적으로 또는 대체적으로, U-SIG 및 UHR-SIG는 아래의 방법을 기초로 프리앰블 펑처링에 관한 정보를 포함할 수 있다. U-SIG는 모든 대역에 관한 프리앰블 펑처링에 관한 정보(즉, 프리앰블 펑처링 패턴에 관한 정보)를 포함할 수 있다. 즉, UHR-SIG는 프리앰블 펑처링에 관한 정보를 포함하지 않고, U-SIG 만이 프리앰블 펑처링에 관한 정보(즉, 프리앰블 펑처링 패턴에 관한 정보)를 포함할 수 있다. Additionally or alternatively, U-SIG and UHR-SIG may include information about preamble puncturing based on the following methods. U-SIG may include information about preamble puncturing for all bands (i.e., information about preamble puncturing pattern). That is, UHR-SIG does not include information about preamble puncturing, and only U-SIG may include information about preamble puncturing (i.e., information about preamble puncturing pattern).

U-SIG는 20 MHz 단위로 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 80 MHz PPDU가 구성되는 경우, U-SIG가 복제될 수 있다. 즉, 80 MHz PPDU 내에 동일한 4개의 U-SIG가 포함될 수 있다. 80 MHz 대역폭을 초과하는 PPDU는 서로 다른 U-SIG를 포함할 수 있다. U-SIG can be configured in 20 MHz units. For example, if an 80 MHz PPDU is configured, U-SIG can be duplicated. That is, four identical U-SIGs can be included in an 80 MHz PPDU. PPDUs exceeding 80 MHz bandwidth can contain different U-SIGs.

도 5의 UHR-SIG는 수신 STA을 위한 제어 정보를 포함할 수 있다. UHR-SIG는 적어도 하나의 심볼을 통해 송신될 수 있고, 하나의 심볼은 4 us의 길이를 가질 수 있다. UHR-SIG를 위해 사용되는 심볼의 개수에 관한 정보는 U-SIG에 포함될 수 있다. The UHR-SIG of FIG. 5 may include control information for a receiving STA. The UHR-SIG may be transmitted through at least one symbol, and one symbol may have a length of 4 us. Information about the number of symbols used for the UHR-SIG may be included in the U-SIG.

UHR-SIG는 U-SIG 필드에 추가 신호를 제공하여 STA가 UHR PPDU를 해석(interpret)/디코딩할 수 있도록 합니다. UHR-SIG 필드에는 모든 사용자에게 공통으로 적용되는 U-SIG 오버플로 비트(U-SIG overflow bits)가 포함될 수 있다. 또한 UHR-SIG 필드에는 리소스 할당 정보가 포함되어 있어, STA이 데이터 필드/UHR-STF/UHR-LTF를 포함하는 필드들(즉, UHR modulated fields of an UHR PPDU)에서 사용되는 자원을 look-up(조회)하는 것이 가능하다. UHR-SIG provides additional signals to the U-SIG field to enable STAs to interpret/decode UHR PPDUs. The UHR-SIG field may contain U-SIG overflow bits that are common to all users. The UHR-SIG field also contains resource allocation information, allowing STAs to look up resources used in fields containing data fields/UHR-STF/UHR-LTF (i.e., UHR modulated fields of an UHR PPDU).

도 5에 도시된 UHR-LTF, UHR-STF, 데이터 필드의 주파수 자원은 복수의 서브캐리어/톤으로 정의되는 RU(자원유닛)을 기초로 결정될 수 있다. 즉 본 명세서의 UHR-LTF, UHR-STF, 데이터 필드는 복수의 서브캐리어/톤으로 정의되는 RU(자원유닛)을 통해 송신/수신될 수 있다. The frequency resources of the UHR-LTF, UHR-STF, and data fields illustrated in Fig. 5 can be determined based on RUs (resource units) defined by multiple subcarriers/tones. That is, the UHR-LTF, UHR-STF, and data fields of this specification can be transmitted/received through RUs (resource units) defined by multiple subcarriers/tones.

도 6은 20MHz PPDU를 위해 사용되는 자원유닛(RU)의 배치를 나타내는 도면이다. 즉 20 MHz PPDU에 포함되는 UHR-LTF, UHR-STF 및/또는 데이터 필드는 도 6에 정의되는 다양한 RU 중 적어도 어느 하나를 통해 송신/수신될 수 있다. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the layout of resource units (RUs) used for a 20 MHz PPDU. That is, UHR-LTF, UHR-STF and/or data fields included in a 20 MHz PPDU can be transmitted/received through at least one of various RUs defined in FIG. 6.

도 6의 최상단에 도시된 바와 같이, 26-유닛(즉, 26개의 톤에 상응하는 유닛)이 배치될 수 있다. 20MHz 대역의 최좌측(leftmost) 대역에는 6개의 톤이 가드(Guard) 대역으로 사용되고, 20MHz 대역의 최우측(rightmost) 대역에는 5개의 톤이 가드 대역으로 사용될 수 있다. 또한 중심대역, 즉 DC 대역에는 7개의 DC 톤이 삽입되고, DC 대역의 좌우측으로 각 13개의 톤에 상응하는 26-유닛이 존재할 수 있다. 또한, 기타 대역에는 26-유닛, 52-유닛, 106-유닛이 할당될 수 있다. 각 유닛은 수신 스테이션, 즉 사용자를 위해 할당될 수 있다. As shown in the top of Fig. 6, 26 units (i.e., units corresponding to 26 tones) can be arranged. Six tones can be used as a guard band in the leftmost band of the 20MHz band, and five tones can be used as a guard band in the rightmost band of the 20MHz band. In addition, seven DC tones can be inserted in the center band, i.e., the DC band, and 26 units corresponding to 13 tones can exist on the left and right sides of the DC band, respectively. In addition, 26 units, 52 units, and 106 units can be allocated to other bands. Each unit can be allocated for a receiving station, i.e., a user.

한편, 도 6의 RU 배치는 다수의 사용자(MU)를 위한 상황뿐만 아니라, 단일 사용자(SU)를 위한 상황에서도 활용되며, 이 경우에는 도 4의 최하단에 도시된 바와 같이 1개의 242-유닛을 사용하는 것이 가능하며 이 경우에는 3개의 DC 톤이 삽입될 수 있다. Meanwhile, the RU arrangement of Fig. 6 is utilized not only in a situation for multiple users (MUs) but also in a situation for a single user (SU), in which case it is possible to use one 242-unit as shown at the bottom of Fig. 4, in which case three DC tones can be inserted.

도 6의 일례에서는 다양한 크기의 RU, 즉, 26-RU, 52-RU, 106-RU, 242-RU 등이 제안되었는 바, 이러한 RU의 구체적인 크기는 확장 또는 증가할 수 있기 때문에, 본 실시예는 각 RU의 구체적인 크기(즉, 상응하는 톤의 개수)에 제한되지 않는다. 본 명세서에서 N-RU는 N-tone RU 등으로 표시될 수 있다. 예를 들어 26-RU는 26-tone RU라 표시될 수 있다. In the example of Fig. 6, RUs of various sizes, i.e., 26-RU, 52-RU, 106-RU, 242-RU, etc., are proposed, and since the specific sizes of these RUs can be expanded or increased, the present embodiment is not limited to the specific size of each RU (i.e., the number of corresponding tones). In this specification, N-RU may be represented as N-tone RU, etc. For example, 26-RU may be represented as 26-tone RU.

도 7은 40MHz PPDU를 위해 사용되는 자원유닛(RU)의 배치를 나타내는 도면이다. Figure 7 is a diagram showing the layout of resource units (RUs) used for 40MHz PPDU.

도 6의 일례에서 다양한 크기의 RU가 사용된 것과 마찬가지로, 도 7의 일례 역시 26-RU, 52-RU, 106-RU, 242-RU, 484-RU 등이 사용될 수 있다. 또한, 중심주파수에는 5개의 DC 톤이 삽입될 수 있고, 40MHz 대역의 최좌측(leftmost) 대역에는 12개의 톤이 가드(Guard) 대역으로 사용되고, 40MHz 대역의 최우측(rightmost) 대역에는 11개의 톤이 가드 대역으로 사용될 수 있다. As in the example of FIG. 6 where RUs of various sizes were used, the example of FIG. 7 can also use 26-RU, 52-RU, 106-RU, 242-RU, 484-RU, etc. In addition, 5 DC tones can be inserted at the center frequency, 12 tones can be used as a guard band in the leftmost band of the 40 MHz band, and 11 tones can be used as a guard band in the rightmost band of the 40 MHz band.

또한, 도시된 바와 같이, 단일 사용자를 위해 사용되는 경우, 484-RU가 사용될 수 있다. 한편, RU의 구체적인 개수가 변경될 수 있다는 점은 도 6의 일례와 동일하다. Also, as illustrated, 484-RU can be used when used for a single user. Meanwhile, the specific number of RUs can be changed, which is the same as the example in Fig. 6.

도 8은 80MHz PPDU를 위해 사용되는 자원유닛(RU)의 배치를 나타내는 도면이다. 본 명세서에서 사용되는 자원유닛(RU)의 배치는 다양하게 변경될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 80MHz 대역 상에서 사용되는 자원유닛(RU)의 배치는 다양하게 변경될 수 있다.Figure 8 is a diagram showing the layout of resource units (RUs) used for 80MHz PPDU. The layout of resource units (RUs) used in this specification may be changed in various ways. For example, the layout of resource units (RUs) used on an 80MHz band may be changed in various ways.

도 9는 UL-MU에 따른 동작을 나타낸다. 도시된 바와 같이, 송신 STA(예를 들어, AP)는 contending (즉, Backoff 동작)을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하여 TXOP(925)를 획득하고, Trigger frame(930)을 송신할 수 있다. 즉, 송신 STA(예를 들어, AP)은 Trigger Frame(930)이 포함된 PPDU를 송신할 수 있다. Trigger frame이 포함된 PPDU가 수신되면 SIFS 만큼의 delay 이후 TB(trigger-based) PPDU가 송신된다. Fig. 9 shows an operation according to UL-MU. As illustrated, a transmitting STA (e.g., AP) can obtain a TXOP (925) by performing channel access through contending (i.e., Backoff operation) and transmit a Trigger frame (930). That is, the transmitting STA (e.g., AP) can transmit a PPDU including a Trigger Frame (930). When a PPDU including a Trigger frame is received, a TB (trigger-based) PPDU is transmitted after a delay of SIFS.

TB PPDU(941, 942)는 동일한 시간 대에 송신되고, Trigger frame(930) 내에 AID가 표시된 복수의 STA(예를 들어, User STA)으로부터 송신될 수 있다. TB PPDU에 대한 ACK 프레임(950)은 다양한 형태로 구현될 수 있다. 예를 들어, TB PPDU에 대한 ACK 프레임(950)은 BA(block ACK)의 형태로 구현될 수 있다.TB PPDU (941, 942) can be transmitted at the same time zone and can be transmitted from multiple STAs (e.g., User STAs) whose AIDs are indicated in the Trigger frame (930). The ACK frame (950) for TB PPDU can be implemented in various forms. For example, the ACK frame (950) for TB PPDU can be implemented in the form of BA (block ACK).

도 9에서, Trigger Frame(930), TB PPDU(941, 942) 및/또는 ACK 프레임(950)의 전송(들)은 TXOP(925)이내에서 수행될 수 있다.In FIG. 9, transmission(s) of Trigger Frame (930), TB PPDU (941, 942) and/or ACK frame (950) can be performed within TXOP (925).

도 10은 2.4 GHz 밴드 내에서 사용/지원/정의되는 채널의 일례를 나타낸다. Figure 10 shows an example of channels used/supported/defined within the 2.4 GHz band.

2.4 GHz 밴드는 제1 밴드(대역) 등의 다른 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다. 또한, 2.4 GHz 밴드는 중심주파수가 2.4 GHz에 인접한 채널(예를 들어, 중심주파수가 2.4 내지 2.5 GHz 내에 위치하는 채널)들이 사용/지원/정의되는 주파수 영역을 의미할 수 있다.The 2.4 GHz band may be referred to by other names, such as the first band (band), etc. In addition, the 2.4 GHz band may refer to a frequency range in which channels with center frequencies adjacent to 2.4 GHz (e.g., channels with center frequencies located within 2.4 to 2.5 GHz) are used/supported/defined.

2.4 GHz 밴드에는 다수의 20 MHz 채널이 포함될 수 있다. 2.4 GHz 밴드 내의 20 MHz은 다수의 채널 인덱스(예를 들어, 인덱스 1 내지 인덱스 14)를 가질 수 있다. 예를 들어, 채널 인덱스 1이 할당되는 20 MHz 채널의 중심주파수는 2.412 GHz일 수 있고, 채널 인덱스 2가 할당되는 20 MHz 채널의 중심주파수는 2.417 GHz일 수 있고, 채널 인덱스 N이 할당되는 20 MHz 채널의 중심주파수는 (2.407 + 0.005*N) GHz일 수 있다. 채널 인덱스는 채널 번호 등의 다양한 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다. 채널 인덱스 및 중심주파수의 구체적인 수치는 변경될 수 있다. A 2.4 GHz band may include multiple 20 MHz channels. The 20 MHz within the 2.4 GHz band may have multiple channel indices (e.g., indices 1 to 14). For example, a 20 MHz channel to which channel index 1 is assigned may have a center frequency of 2.412 GHz, a 20 MHz channel to which channel index 2 is assigned may have a center frequency of 2.417 GHz, and a 20 MHz channel to which channel index N is assigned may have a center frequency of (2.407 + 0.005*N) GHz. The channel indices may be referred to by various names, such as channel numbers. The specific numerical values of the channel indices and center frequencies may change.

도 10은 2.4 GHz 밴드 내의 4개의 채널을 예시적으로 나타낸다. 도시된 제1 주파수 영역(1010) 내지 제4 주파수 영역(1040)은 각각 하나의 채널을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제1 주파수 영역(1010)은 1번 채널(1번 인덱스를 가지는 20 MHz 채널)을 포함할 수 있다. 이때 1번 채널의 중심 주파수는 2412 MHz로 설정될 수 있다. 제2 주파수 영역(1020)는 6번 채널을 포함할 수 있다. 이때 6번 채널의 중심 주파수는 2437 MHz로 설정될 수 있다. 제3 주파수 영역(1030)은 11번 채널을 포함할 수 있다. 이때 채널 11의 중심 주파수는 2462 MHz로 설정될 수 있다. 제4 주파수 영역(1040)는 14번 채널을 포함할 수 있다. 이때 채널 14의 중심 주파수는 2484 MHz로 설정될 수 있다.FIG. 10 exemplarily shows four channels within a 2.4 GHz band. The illustrated first frequency domain (1010) to fourth frequency domain (1040) may each include one channel. For example, the first frequency domain (1010) may include channel 1 (a 20 MHz channel having an index of 1). In this case, the center frequency of channel 1 may be set to 2412 MHz. The second frequency domain (1020) may include channel 6. In this case, the center frequency of channel 6 may be set to 2437 MHz. The third frequency domain (1030) may include channel 11. In this case, the center frequency of channel 11 may be set to 2462 MHz. The fourth frequency domain (1040) may include channel 14. In this case, the center frequency of channel 14 may be set to 2484 MHz.

도 11은 5 GHz 밴드 내에서 사용/지원/정의되는 채널의 일례를 도시한다. Figure 11 illustrates an example of channels used/supported/defined within the 5 GHz band.

5 GHz 밴드는 제2 밴드/대역 등의 다른 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다. 5 GHz 밴드는 중심주파수가 5 GHz 이상 6 GHz 미만 (또는 5.9 GHz 미만)인 채널들이 사용/지원/정의되는 주파수 영역을 의미할 수 있다. 또는 5 GHz 밴드는 4.5 GHz에서 5.5 GHz 사이에서 복수개의 채널을 포함할 수 있다. 도 11에 도시된 구체적인 수치는 변경될 수 있다. The 5 GHz band may be referred to by other names such as second band/band, etc. The 5 GHz band may refer to a frequency range in which channels having a center frequency of 5 GHz or more but less than 6 GHz (or less than 5.9 GHz) are used/supported/defined. Alternatively, the 5 GHz band may include multiple channels between 4.5 GHz and 5.5 GHz. The specific figures shown in FIG. 11 may be subject to change.

5 GHz 밴드 내의 복수의 채널들은 UNII(Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure)-1, UNII-2, UNII-3, ISM을 포함한다. UNII-1은 UNII Low로 불릴 수 있다. UNII-2는 UNII Mid와 UNII-2Extended로 불리는 주파수 영역을 포함할 수 있다. UNII-3은 UNII-Upper로 불릴 수 있다. Multiple channels within the 5 GHz band include Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII)-1, UNII-2, UNII-3, and ISM. UNII-1 may be referred to as UNII Low. UNII-2 may include frequency ranges referred to as UNII Mid and UNII-2Extended. UNII-3 may be referred to as UNII-Upper.

5 GHz 밴드 내에는 복수의 채널들이 설정될 수 있고, 각 채널의 대역폭은 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz 또는 160 MHz 등으로 다양하게 설정될 수 있다. 예를 들어, UNII-1 및 UNII-2 내의 5170 MHz 내지 5330MHz 주파수 영역/범위는 8개의 20 MHz 채널로 구분될 수 있다. 5170 MHz에서 5330MHz 주파수 영역/범위는 40 MHz 주파수 영역을 통하여 4개의 채널로 구분될 수 있다. 5170 MHz에서 5330MHz 주파수 영역/범위는 80 MHz 주파수 영역을 통하여 2개의 채널로 구분될 수 있다. 또는, 5170 MHz에서 5330MHz 주파수 영역/범위는 160 MHz 주파수 영역을 통하여 1개의 채널로 구분될 수 있다.Within the 5 GHz band, multiple channels can be set, and the bandwidth of each channel can be variously set to 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz, or 160 MHz. For example, the 5170 MHz to 5330 MHz frequency domain/range within UNII-1 and UNII-2 can be divided into eight 20 MHz channels. The 5170 MHz to 5330 MHz frequency domain/range can be divided into four channels through a 40 MHz frequency domain. The 5170 MHz to 5330 MHz frequency domain/range can be divided into two channels through an 80 MHz frequency domain. Alternatively, the 5170 MHz to 5330 MHz frequency domain/range can be divided into one channel through a 160 MHz frequency domain.

도 12는 6 GHz 밴드 내에서 사용/지원/정의되는 채널의 일례를 도시한다. Figure 12 illustrates an example of channels used/supported/defined within the 6 GHz band.

6 GHz 밴드는 제3 밴드/대역 등의 다른 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다. 6 GHz 밴드는 중심주파수가 5.9 GHz 이상인 채널들이 사용/지원/정의되는 주파수 영역을 의미할 수 있다. 도 12에 도시된 구체적인 수치는 변경될 수 있다. The 6 GHz band may be referred to by other names such as the third band/band, etc. The 6 GHz band may refer to a frequency range in which channels with center frequencies higher than 5.9 GHz are used/supported/defined. The specific figures shown in Fig. 12 may be subject to change.

예를 들어, 도 12의 20 MHz 채널은 5.940 GHz부터 정의될 수 있다. 구체적으로 도 12의 20 MHz 채널 중 최-좌측 채널은 1번 인덱스(또는, 채널 인덱스, 채널 번호 등)를 가질 수 있고, 중심주파수는 5.945 GHz가 할당될 수 있다. 즉, 인덱스 N번 채널의 중심주파수는 (5.940 + 0.005*N) GHz로 결정될 수 있다. For example, the 20 MHz channel of Fig. 12 can be defined from 5.940 GHz. Specifically, the leftmost channel among the 20 MHz channels of Fig. 12 can have an index of 1 (or channel index, channel number, etc.), and a center frequency of 5.945 GHz can be assigned. That is, the center frequency of the index N channel can be determined as (5.940 + 0.005*N) GHz.

이에 따라, 도 12의 20 MHz 채널의 인덱스(또는 채널 번호)는, 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29, 33, 37, 41, 45, 49, 53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77, 81, 85, 89, 93, 97, 101, 105, 109, 113, 117, 121, 125, 129, 133, 137, 141, 145, 149, 153, 157, 161, 165, 169, 173, 177, 181, 185, 189, 193, 197, 201, 205, 209, 213, 217, 221, 225, 229, 233일 수 있다. 또한, 상술한 (5.940 + 0.005*N) GHz 규칙에 따라 도 12의 40 MHz 채널의 인덱스는 3, 11, 19, 27, 35, 43, 51, 59, 67, 75, 83, 91, 99, 107, 115, 123, 131, 139, 147, 155, 163, 171, 179, 187, 195, 203, 211, 219, 227일 수 있다. Accordingly, the indices (or channel numbers) of the 20 MHz channels of FIG. 12 are 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29, 33, 37, 41, 45, 49, 53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77, 81, 85, 89, 93, 97, 101, 105, 109, 113, 117, 121, 125, 129, 133, 137, 141, 145, 149, 153, 157, 161, 165, 169, 173, 177, 181, 185, 189, 193, It can be 197, 201, 205, 209, 213, 217, 221, 225, 229, 233. Also, according to the above-mentioned (5.940 + 0.005*N) GHz rule, the indices of the 40 MHz channel in Fig. 12 can be 3, 11, 19, 27, 35, 43, 51, 59, 67, 75, 83, 91, 99, 107, 115, 123, 131, 139, 147, 155, 163, 171, 179, 187, 195, 203, 211, 219, 227.

이하에서는 MAC 프레임의 구조 및 타입/서브타입에 대해 설명한다. Below, the structure and types/subtypes of MAC frames are described.

도 13은 MAC 프레임의 헤더의 일례를 나타낸다. 도시된 바와 같이 MAC 프레임은 2 옥텟 길이의 frame control 필드/정보, 2 옥텟 길이의 duration 필드/정보, 6 옥텟 길이의 RA(Receiver Address) 필드/정보, 6 옥텟 길이의 TA(Transmitter Address) 필드/정보를 포함할 수 있다. 도 13에 도시된 바와 같이 4개의 필드는 서로 연속할 수 있다. 도 13의 MAC 헤더는 다양하게 변형될 수 있고, 도시된 4개의 필드 사이에 새로운 필드가 삽입되거나 도시된 필드 중 적어도 하나의 필드가 생략될 수 있다. Fig. 13 shows an example of a header of a MAC frame. As illustrated, the MAC frame may include a frame control field/information of 2 octets in length, a duration field/information of 2 octets in length, a RA (Receiver Address) field/information of 6 octets in length, and a TA (Transmitter Address) field/information of 6 octets in length. As illustrated in Fig. 13, the four fields may be consecutive to each other. The MAC header of Fig. 13 may be modified in various ways, and a new field may be inserted between the four illustrated fields, or at least one of the illustrated fields may be omitted.

도 13에 도시된 MAC 헤더는 MAC 프레임의 제일 앞에 위치할 수 있다. 즉 MAC 프레임은 도 13과 같은 MAC 헤더 및 상기 MAC 헤더에 연속하는 MAC body 필드/정보를 포함할 수 있다. 도 13의 MAC 헤더를 포함하는 MAC 프레임은 도 5에 도시된 PPDU(예를 들어, UHR PPDU)의 데이터 필드에 삽입/포함된다. The MAC header illustrated in Fig. 13 may be located at the very front of the MAC frame. That is, the MAC frame may include a MAC header as illustrated in Fig. 13 and MAC body fields/information consecutive to the MAC header. The MAC frame including the MAC header of Fig. 13 is inserted/included in the data field of the PPDU (e.g., UHR PPDU) illustrated in Fig. 5.

본 명세서의 PPDU의 데이터 필드에 포함되는 MAC 프레임은 다양한 type으로 분류될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 본 명세서의 MAC 프레임은 control frame, management frame, data frame으로 분류될 수 있다. The MAC frames included in the data field of the PPDU of this specification can be classified into various types. For example, the MAC frames of this specification can be classified into a control frame, a management frame, and a data frame.

예를 들어, management frame는 종래 WLAN에서 정의된 Association Request, Association Response, Reassociation Request, Reassociation Response, Probe Request, Probe Response, Beacon, Disassociation, Authentication, Deauthentication 프레임/신호를 포함한다. 상기 management frame을 위하여 도 13의 type 필드(B3 및 B2)의 값은 00으로 설정된다. 또한 도 13의 subtype 필드(B7, B6, B5, B4)의 값은 다음과 같다: Association Request(0000), Association Response(0001), Reassociation Request(0010), Reassociation Response(0011), Probe Request(0100), Probe Response(0101), Beacon(1000), Disassociation(1010), Authentication(1011), Deauthentication(1100). For example, the management frame includes Association Request, Association Response, Reassociation Request, Reassociation Response, Probe Request, Probe Response, Beacon, Disassociation, Authentication, and Deauthentication frames/signals defined in conventional WLAN. For the management frame, the values of the type fields (B3 and B2) of FIG. 13 are set to 00. In addition, the values of the subtype fields (B7, B6, B5, B4) of FIG. 13 are as follows: Association Request (0000), Association Response (0001), Reassociation Request (0010), Reassociation Response (0011), Probe Request (0100), Probe Response (0101), Beacon (1000), Disassociation (1010), Authentication (1011), Deauthentication (1100).

예를 들어, control frame는 종래 WLAN에서 정의된 Trigger Beamforming Report Poll, NDP Announcement (NDPA), Control Frame Extension, Control Wrapper, Block Ack Request (BlockAckReq), Block Ack (BlockAck), PS-Poll, RTS, CTS, Ack, CF-End 프레임/신호를 포함한다. 상기 control frame을 위하여 도 13의 type 필드(B3 및 B2)의 값은 01로 설정된다. 또한 도 13의 subtype 필드(B7, B6, B5, B4)의 값은 다음과 같다: Trigger(0010), Beamforming Report Poll(0100), NDP Announcement(0101), Control Frame Extension(0110), Control Wrapper(0111), BlockAckReq(1000), BlockAck(1001), PS-Poll(1010), RTS(1011), CTS(1100), Ack(1101), CF-End(1110).For example, the control frame includes Trigger Beamforming Report Poll, NDP Announcement (NDPA), Control Frame Extension, Control Wrapper, Block Ack Request (BlockAckReq), Block Ack (BlockAck), PS-Poll, RTS, CTS, Ack, CF-End frames/signals defined in conventional WLAN. For the control frame, the values of the type fields (B3 and B2) in Fig. 13 are set to 01. Also, the values of the subtype fields (B7, B6, B5, B4) in Fig. 13 are as follows: Trigger (0010), Beamforming Report Poll (0100), NDP Announcement (0101), Control Frame Extension (0110), Control Wrapper (0111), BlockAckReq (1000), BlockAck (1001), PS-Poll (1010), RTS (1011), CTS (1100), Ack (1101), CF-End (1110).

예를 들어, data frame은 종래 WLAN에서 정의된 (QoS) Data, (QoS) Null 등을 포함한다. 상기 management frame을 위하여 도 13의 type 필드(B3 및 B2)의 값은 10으로 설정된다. For example, the data frame includes (QoS) Data, (QoS) Null, etc. defined in conventional WLAN. For the management frame, the value of the type field (B3 and B2) of Fig. 13 is set to 10.

본 명세서에서 사용하는 MAC 프레임/신호는 상술한 type 필드/정보 및 subtype 필드/정보를 통해 식별될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 본 명세서의 “trigger frame”은 MAC 헤더의 frame control 필드 내의 type 비트인 B3, B2 비트가 01로 설정되면서, 또한 상기 frame control 필드 내의 subtype 비트인 B7, B6, B5, B4 비트가 0010으로 설정된 MAC 프레임을 의미할 수 있다. 본 명세서에서 설명되는 다양한 MAC 프레임은 다양한 PPDU(예를 들어, HE/VHT/HE/EHT/UHR PPDU)의 데이터 필드에 삽입/포함된다. The MAC frame/signal used in this specification can be identified through the type field/information and subtype field/information described above. For example, the “trigger frame” in this specification can mean a MAC frame in which the type bits B3 and B2 bits in the frame control field of the MAC header are set to 01, and the subtype bits B7, B6, B5, B4 bits in the frame control field are set to 0010. Various MAC frames described in this specification are inserted/included in the data fields of various PPDUs (e.g., HE/VHT/HE/EHT/UHR PPDUs).

도 14는 본 명세서의 송신 장치 및/또는 수신 장치의 변형된 일례를 나타낸다. FIG. 14 illustrates a modified example of a transmitter and/or receiver of the present specification.

도 1 내지 도 4에 도시된 장치(예를 들어, AP STA, non-AP STA)은 도 14와 같이 변형될 수 있다. 도 14의 트랜시버(630)는 도 1의 트랜시버(113, 123)와 동일할 수 있다. 도 14의 트랜시버(630)는 수신기(receiver) 및 송신기(transmitter)를 포함할 수 있다. The devices (e.g., AP STA, non-AP STA) illustrated in FIGS. 1 to 4 may be modified as illustrated in FIG. 14. The transceiver (630) of FIG. 14 may be identical to the transceiver (113, 123) of FIG. 1. The transceiver (630) of FIG. 14 may include a receiver and a transmitter.

도 14의 프로세서(610)는 도 1의 프로세서(111, 121)과 동일할 수 있다. 또는, 도 14의 프로세서(610)는 도 1의 프로세싱 칩(114, 124)과 동일할 수 있다.The processor (610) of FIG. 14 may be identical to the processor (111, 121) of FIG. 1. Alternatively, the processor (610) of FIG. 14 may be identical to the processing chip (114, 124) of FIG. 1.

도 14의 메모리(150)는 도 1의 메모리(112, 122)와 동일할 수 있다. 또는, 도 14의 메모리(150)는 도 1의 메모리(112, 122)와는 상이한 별도의 외부 메모리일 수 있다. The memory (150) of Fig. 14 may be the same as the memory (112, 122) of Fig. 1. Alternatively, the memory (150) of Fig. 14 may be a separate external memory different from the memory (112, 122) of Fig. 1.

도 14를 참조하면, 전력 관리 모듈(611)은 프로세서(610) 및/또는 트랜시버(630)에 대한 전력을 관리한다. 배터리(612)는 전력 관리 모듈(611)에 전력을 공급한다. 디스플레이(613)는 프로세서(610)에 의해 처리된 결과를 출력한다. 키패드(614)는 프로세서(610)에 의해 사용될 입력을 수신한다. 키패드(614)는 디스플레이(613) 상에 표시될 수 있다. SIM 카드(615)는 휴대 전화 및 컴퓨터와 같은 휴대 전화 장치에서 가입자를 식별하고 인증하는 데에 사용되는 IMSI(international mobile subscriber identity) 및 그와 관련된 키를 안전하게 저장하기 위하여 사용되는 집적 회로일 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 14, the power management module (611) manages power for the processor (610) and/or the transceiver (630). The battery (612) supplies power to the power management module (611). The display (613) outputs results processed by the processor (610). The keypad (614) receives input to be used by the processor (610). The keypad (614) may be displayed on the display (613). The SIM card (615) may be an integrated circuit used to securely store an international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) and an associated key used to identify and authenticate a subscriber in a mobile phone device, such as a mobile phone and a computer.

도 14를 참조하면, 스피커(640)는 프로세서(610)에 의해 처리된 소리 관련 결과를 출력할 수 있다. 마이크(641)는 프로세서(610)에 의해 사용될 소리 관련 입력을 수신할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 14, the speaker (640) can output sound-related results processed by the processor (610). The microphone (641) can receive sound-related input to be used by the processor (610).

이하 본 명세서의 기술적 특징이 보다 상세하게 설명된다. The technical features of this specification are described in more detail below.

HT/VHT/HE/EHT/UHR에 기초하는 PPDU의 최대 Duration은 최대 5.484ms 일 수 있다. 예를 들어, IEEE 802.11 표준에서는 aPPDUmaxtime이라는 파라미터를 기초로 PPDU의 최대 duration을 정할 수 있다. The maximum Duration of a PPDU based on HT/VHT/HE/EHT/UHR can be up to 5.484ms. For example, in the IEEE 802.11 standard, the maximum duration of a PPDU can be determined based on a parameter called aPPDUmaxtime.

본 명세서는 종래의 PPDU를 개선하는 새로운 타입/포맷/카테고리의 PPDU에 관련될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 본 명세서의 동작에 관련되는 새로운 타입/포맷/카테고리의 PPDU는 다양한 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다. 예를 들어 본 명세서의 동작에 관련되는 PPDU는 Small PPDU, Short PPDU, Low latency PPDU, TX PPDU, RX PPDU, 제1/2 PPDU 등의 다양한 명칭으로 사용될 수 있다. 이하에서는 설명의 편의를 위하여 Small PPDU라는 명칭이 사용되지만, 본 명세서의 기술적 특징이 이러한 small PPDU라는 명칭에 제한되지 않는다. This specification may relate to a new type/format/category of PPDU which improves the conventional PPDU. For example, the new type/format/category of PPDU related to the operation of this specification may be called by various names. For example, the PPDU related to the operation of this specification may be used by various names such as Small PPDU, Short PPDU, Low latency PPDU, TX PPDU, RX PPDU, 1st/2nd PPDU, etc. In the following, the name Small PPDU is used for convenience of explanation, but the technical features of this specification are not limited to this name Small PPDU.

본 명세서에 관련된 small PPDU는 종래의 PPDU에 비해 최대 duration 이 짧게 설정될 수 있다. 추가적으로 또는 대체적으로(additionally or alternatively), 상기 small PPDU는 종래의 PPDU와 동일한 aPPDUmaxtime 파라미터가 적용되지만, WIFI 표준에서 새롭게 정의되는 파라미터/필드/서브필드 또는 종래의 파라미터/필드/서브필드에 기초하여 그 duration이 종래의 PPDU에 비해 짧게 설정될 수 있다. 추가적으로 또는 대체적으로(additionally or alternatively), 상기 small PPDU는 Low latency PPDU를 포함하지 않는 PPDU일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 Low latency PPDU는 Low latency 트래픽을 전달하는 PPDU일 수 있다. 상기 Low latency 트래픽은 해당 트래픽에 할당된 QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency 중 적어도 하나를 기초로 식별될 수 있다. 추가적으로 또는 대체적으로(additionally or alternatively), 상기 small PPDU는 immediate ACK이 요구되지 않고 delayed ACK이 허용되는 복수의 PPDU의 집합을 의미할 수 있다. 추가적으로 또는 대체적으로(additionally or alternatively), 상기 small PPDU는 본 명세서에서 제시하는 새로운 구조의 preamble(예를 들어, 이하에서 설명되는 바와 같이 Legacy preamble이 생략되는 preamble, 또는 HE/EHT/UHR-LTF 만을 포함하는 preamble, 또는 HE/EHT/UHR-STF와 HE/EHT/UHR-LTF만을 포함하는 preamble)을 기초로 구성되는 PPDU를 의미할 수 있다. 본 명세서의 small PPDU는 프리앰블 및 상기 프리앰블에 연속하는 데이터 필드를 포함할 수 있고 상기 데이터 필드는 PSDU(Physical Service Data Unit)를 포함할 수 있다. 본 명세서에 관련된 small PPDU는 위에서 제시되는 적어도 하나의 기준/정의에 기초하여 종래의 PPDU와 구별될 수 있다. 본 명세서에 새롭게 제안하는 PPDU(예를 들어 small PPDU)와 구별되는 종래의 PPDU는 다양한 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다. 예를 들어 long/large/legacy/HT/VHT/HE/EHT/UHR- PPDU 등의 다양한 명칭이 사용될 수 있다. The small PPDU related to the present specification may have a maximum duration set shorter than that of a conventional PPDU. Additionally or alternatively, the small PPDU may have the same aPPDUmaxtime parameter as that of a conventional PPDU, but its duration may be set shorter than that of a conventional PPDU based on a parameter/field/subfield newly defined in the WIFI standard or a conventional parameter/field/subfield. Additionally or alternatively, the small PPDU may be a PPDU that does not include a Low latency PPDU. For example, the Low latency PPDU may be a PPDU that carries Low latency traffic. The Low latency traffic may be identified based on at least one of QoS/AC (Access category)/TID (Traffic ID)/Delay/latency assigned to the corresponding traffic. Additionally or alternatively, the small PPDU may mean a set of a plurality of PPDUs for which immediate ACK is not required and delayed ACK is allowed. Additionally or alternatively, the small PPDU may mean a PPDU configured based on a new structured preamble presented in the present specification (for example, a preamble in which the Legacy preamble is omitted as described below, or a preamble including only HE/EHT/UHR-LTF, or a preamble including only HE/EHT/UHR-STF and HE/EHT/UHR-LTF). The small PPDU of the present specification may include a preamble and a data field consecutive to the preamble, and the data field may include a PSDU (Physical Service Data Unit). The small PPDU related to the present specification may be distinguished from a conventional PPDU based on at least one criterion/definition presented above. Conventional PPDUs, which are distinct from the newly proposed PPDUs in this specification (e.g., small PPDUs), may be called by various names. For example, various names such as long/large/legacy/HT/VHT/HE/EHT/UHR-PPDU may be used.

추가적으로 또는 대체적으로(additionally or alternatively), 상기 small PPDU는 PPDU의 duration의 길이와는 무관하게 결정될 수 있다. 예를 들어, PPDU의 physical version에 따라 small PPDU 여부가 결정되거나, PPDU의 type에 따라 small PPDU 여부가 결정될 수도 있다. 이때 PPDU의 type에 관한 정보는 PPDU의 U-SIG 필드, 및/또는 EHT/UHR-SIG 필드 등에 포함될 수 있다. Additionally or alternatively, the small PPDU may be determined independently of the length of the duration of the PPDU. For example, whether it is a small PPDU may be determined based on the physical version of the PPDU, or whether it is a small PPDU may be determined based on the type of the PPDU. In this case, information about the type of the PPDU may be included in the U-SIG field of the PPDU, and/or the EHT/UHR-SIG field.

도 15는 본 명세서에서 제안되는 장치에서 수행되는 동작에 관련된다. Figure 15 relates to operations performed in the device proposed in this specification.

도시된 TXOP 홀더(1500)는 TXOP를 획득한다. TXOP를 획득하는 방법은 종래 무선랜 표준에 따라 RTS frame 및 CTS frame을 교환하는 방식에 기초하거나, 또는 종래의 CTS-to-self frame을 송신하거나, 또는 종래의 TWT(target wake time) 설정에 기초할 수 있다. 즉 본 명세서의 TXOP 홀더의 정의는 종래의 무선랜 표준과 동일할 수 있다. 또한 도 15의 일례에서는 STA1(1501)이 TXOP 리스폰더(responder)일 수 있다. 즉 본 명세서의 TXOP 리스폰더의 정의는 종래의 무선랜 표준과 동일할 수 있다. 예를 들오, 본 명세서의 TXOP 리스폰더(예를 들어 STA1(1501))는 frame exchange sequence 동안에 TXOP 홀더로부터 수신되는 프레임에 대한 응답 프레임을 수신할 수 있지만, 관련된 프로세서에서 TXOP를 획득하지는 않는 STA을 의미할 수 있다. 상기 TXOP 홀더는 non-AP, AP일 수 있고, TXOP 리스폰더는 AP, non-AP일 수 있다. 도 15의 일례는 TXOP 홀더가 AP인 경우이고, 이에 따라 도 15에서 획득된 TXOP는 DL-TXOP 등의 다양한 명칭으로 표현될 수 있다. The illustrated TXOP holder (1500) acquires a TXOP. The method of acquiring the TXOP may be based on a method of exchanging an RTS frame and a CTS frame according to a conventional wireless LAN standard, or may be based on transmitting a conventional CTS-to-self frame, or may be based on a conventional TWT (target wake time) setting. That is, the definition of the TXOP holder of the present specification may be the same as that of the conventional wireless LAN standard. In addition, in the example of FIG. 15, STA1 (1501) may be a TXOP responder. That is, the definition of the TXOP responder of the present specification may be the same as that of the conventional wireless LAN standard. For example, the TXOP responder (e.g., STA1 (1501)) of the present specification may mean an STA that can receive a response frame for a frame received from a TXOP holder during a frame exchange sequence, but does not acquire a TXOP in a related processor. The above TXOP holder can be a non-AP, an AP, and the TXOP responder can be an AP, a non-AP. An example of Fig. 15 is a case where the TXOP holder is an AP, and accordingly, the TXOP obtained in Fig. 15 can be expressed by various names such as DL-TXOP.

예를 들어, 도 15의 일례에 따른 하나의 TXOP 내에서 Small PPDU들을 연속적으로 전송될 수 있다. 다만, small PPDU들 사이에 Low Latency (LL) PPDU나 그 응답(e.g., ACK/Block ACK) 등의 다른 PPDU가 송수신 될 수 있다. 구체적으로 도 15에 도시된 바와 같이, 복수 개의 small PPDU(1510, 1520, 1560) 사이에는 LL PPDU(1540) 및 해당 LL PPDU에 대한 ACK/BA(1550)가 송수신될 수 있다. 본 명세서에 LL PPDU라 불리는 신호는 LL PPDU 뿐만 아니라 LL PPDU에 대한 응답(e.g., Ack/BA)을 포함할 수 있다. For example, Small PPDUs may be transmitted sequentially within one TXOP according to an example of FIG. 15. However, other PPDUs, such as Low Latency (LL) PPDUs or responses thereto (e.g., ACK/Block ACK), may be transmitted and received between small PPDUs. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 15, an LL PPDU (1540) and an ACK/BA (1550) for the corresponding LL PPDU may be transmitted and received between multiple small PPDUs (1510, 1520, 1560). A signal referred to as LL PPDU in this specification may include not only an LL PPDU but also a response (e.g., Ack/BA) to the LL PPDU.

도 15의 일례에서는 LL PPDU가 하향링크를 통해 TXOP 리스폰더 또는 TXOP 홀더가 아닌 제3의 STA(즉, STA2(1520)로 전달되는 일례에 관련된다. 즉, 송신하는 송신 STA(예를 들어, TXOP 홀더(1500))가 이미 획득된 TXOP 내에서 on-going transmission을 선점(preempt)하고 하향링크를 통해 LL PPDU를 송신하는 일례에 관련된다. 즉 도 15의 일례는 DL-TXOP가 획득된 상황에서 DL-preemption이 적용되는 일례에 관련된다. 도 15와 같이 DL-preemption을 기초로 하향링크를 통해 LL PPDU(1540)를 송신하는 경우, STA2(1502)는 TXOP 리스폰더가 아니기 때문에 LL PPDU(1540)에 대한 응답(1550)을 송신하기 어려울 수 있다. 즉 TXOP 홀더(1500)가 DL-TXOP를 획득하는 과정에서 다양한 frame(예를 들어, RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU 등)이 STA2(1502)로 전달될 수 있고, 상기 STA2(1502)는 수신된 frame으로 인하여 NAV(예를 들어, intra-BSS NAV)를 설정할 수 있다. 이로 인해 STA2(1502)는 이미 획득된 TXOP 동안에 LL-PPDU 및/또는 그 응답을 송신하지 못할 수 있다. 이러한 기술적 특징은 본 명세서에서 제안하는 다양한 기술적 특징에 의해 해결될 수 있다. The example of FIG. 15 relates to an example in which an LL PPDU is transmitted to a third STA (i.e., STA2 (1520)) that is not a TXOP responder or TXOP holder via downlink. That is, the example relates to an example in which a transmitting transmitting STA (e.g., TXOP holder (1500)) preempts an on-going transmission within an already acquired TXOP and transmits an LL PPDU via downlink. That is, the example of FIG. 15 relates to an example in which DL-preemption is applied in a situation in which a DL-TXOP is acquired. In case of transmitting an LL PPDU (1540) via downlink based on DL-preemption as in FIG. 15, it may be difficult for STA2 (1502) to transmit a response (1550) to the LL PPDU (1540) because it is not a TXOP responder. That is, the TXOP holder (1500) In the process of acquiring DL-TXOP, various frames (e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.) may be transmitted to STA2 (1502), and STA2 (1502) may set NAV (e.g., intra-BSS NAV) due to the received frame. As a result, STA2 (1502) may not transmit LL-PPDU and/or its response during the already acquired TXOP. This technical feature can be solved by various technical features proposed in this specification.

예를 들어, TXOP holder(1500)가 임의의 시점에 LL PPDU를 전송하는 경우라면, TXOP holder가 전송하는 PPDU(예를 들어, small PPDU(1520))의 xIFS 후에(예를 들어, SIFS가 경과된 이후에) TXOP holder가 LL PPDU를 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, TXOP holder가 아닌 STA(예를 들어, TXOP 홀더도 아니면서 TXOP 리스폰더도 아닌 STA)이 LL PPDU(또는 그 응답)를 전송하기 위해서는, TXOP holder로부터의 허락이 필요할 수 있다. 여기서 TXOP holder로부터의 허락은, TXOP holder로부터 해당 TXOP내의 주파수 자원을 이용해도 된다는 indication 및/또는 주파수 자원의 할당 등의 signalling을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, TXOP holder가 아닌 STA(예를 들어, TXOP 홀더도 아니면서 TXOP 리스폰더도 아닌 STA2(1502))의 LL PPDU 전송(예를 들어 LL PPDU에 대한 ACK/BA의 전송을 포함)을 허용하기 위해서, 각 Small PPDU에서 해당 Small PPDU의 송신이 끝나고 xIFS 후에(예를 들어, SIFS가 경과한 이후에) 상기 LL PPDU를 송수신을 허락할지 아닌지의 여부가 indicate될 수 있다. For example, if the TXOP holder (1500) transmits an LL PPDU at any point in time, the TXOP holder can transmit the LL PPDU after xIFS (e.g., after SIFS has elapsed) of the PPDU (e.g., small PPDU (1520)) transmitted by the TXOP holder. For example, an STA other than the TXOP holder (e.g., an STA that is neither a TXOP holder nor a TXOP responder) may require permission from the TXOP holder to transmit an LL PPDU (or its response). Here, permission from the TXOP holder may include signaling such as an indication from the TXOP holder that it may use frequency resources within the corresponding TXOP and/or allocation of frequency resources. For example, to allow LL PPDU transmission (including transmission of ACK/BA for LL PPDU) of an STA that is not a TXOP holder (e.g., STA2 (1502) that is neither a TXOP holder nor a TXOP responder), it can be indicated in each Small PPDU whether transmission and reception of the LL PPDU is allowed or not after xIFS (e.g., after SIFS has elapsed) after the end of transmission of the corresponding Small PPDU.

예를 들어, 적어도 하나의 Small PPDU(또는 모든 small PPDU)의 U-SIG(및/또는 UHR-SIG)는 Preemption flag (PF) subfield를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 PF subfield는 1 비트의 길이를 가질 수 있다. 예를 들어, PF subfield의 값이 제1 값(예를 들어, 0)이면, 종래와 같이 Preemption은 허용되지 않을 수 있다. 즉, TXOP 홀더도 아니면서 TXOP 리스폰더도 아닌 STA(예를 들어 STA2(1502))는 기존에 획득된 TXOP 동안에 LL PPDU(예를 들어 LL PPDU에 대한 ACK/BA 포함)를 송신할 수 없다. 예를 들어, PF subfield의 값이 제2 값(예를 들어, 0)이면, Preemption이 허용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, TXOP 홀더도 아니면서 TXOP 리스폰더도 아닌 STA(예를 들어 STA2(1502)는 기존에 획득된 TXOP 동안에 LL PPDU(예를 들어 LL PPDU에 대한 ACK/BA 포함)를 송신할 수 있다. For example, the U-SIG (and/or UHR-SIG) of at least one Small PPDU (or all Small PPDUs) may include a Preemption flag (PF) subfield. For example, the PF subfield may have a length of 1 bit. For example, if the value of the PF subfield is the first value (e.g., 0), Preemption may not be allowed as in the conventional manner. That is, an STA (e.g., STA2 (1502)) that is neither a TXOP holder nor a TXOP responder cannot transmit an LL PPDU (e.g., including an ACK/BA for the LL PPDU) during the previously acquired TXOP. For example, if the value of the PF subfield is the second value (e.g., 0), Preemption may be allowed. For example, an STA that is neither a TXOP holder nor a TXOP responder (e.g., STA2 (1502)) can transmit an LL PPDU (e.g., including an ACK/BA for the LL PPDU) during the previously acquired TXOP.

상술한 기술적 특징은 도 15의 일례에 제한되지 않는다. 또한 도 15의 일례는 다양하게 변형될 수 있다. 도 15의 일례는 DL-TXOP 내에서 LL PPDU가 하향링크를 통해 TX-holder/responder가 아닌 제3의 STA에게 전달되는 상황, 즉 DL-TXOP 및 DL-preemption이 적용되는 상황이다. 상술한 기술적 특징은 DL-TXOP 및 UL-preemption이 적용되는 상황에도 적용될 수 있고, UL-TXOP 및 DL-preemption이 적용되는 상황에도 적용될 수 있고, UL-TXOP 및 UL-preemption이 적용되는 상황에도 적용될 수 있다. DL-TXOP 및 UL-preemption이 적용되는 상황은 도 16의 일례에 관련될 수 있다. UL-TXOP 및 DL-preemption이 적용되는 상황은 non-AP가 TXOP 홀더로 동작하고 AP가 TXOP 리스폰더로 동작하고, 상기 AP가 제3의 STA(즉 TXOP 홀더/리스폰더가 아닌 STA)에게 LL PPDU를 하향링크를 통해 송신하는 상황일 수 있다. UL-TXOP 및 UL-preemption이 적용되는 상황은 non-AP가 TXOP 홀더로 동작하고 AP가 TXOP 리스폰더로 동작하고, 제3의 STA(즉 TXOP 홀더/리스폰더가 아닌 STA)가 LL PPDU를 상향링크를 통해 상기 AP로 송신하는 상황일 수 있다. The technical features described above are not limited to the example of FIG. 15. In addition, the example of FIG. 15 can be modified in various ways. The example of FIG. 15 is a situation in which an LL PPDU is transmitted to a third STA other than a TX-holder/responder through a downlink in a DL-TXOP, that is, a situation in which DL-TXOP and DL-preemption are applied. The technical features described above can be applied to a situation in which DL-TXOP and UL-preemption are applied, a situation in which UL-TXOP and DL-preemption are applied, and a situation in which UL-TXOP and UL-preemption are applied. The situation in which DL-TXOP and UL-preemption are applied can be related to the example of FIG. 16. A situation in which UL-TXOP and DL-preemption are applied may be a situation in which a non-AP operates as a TXOP holder and an AP operates as a TXOP responder, and the AP transmits an LL PPDU to a third-party STA (i.e., a STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder) through downlink. A situation in which UL-TXOP and UL-preemption are applied may be a situation in which a non-AP operates as a TXOP holder and an AP operates as a TXOP responder, and a third-party STA (i.e., a STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder) transmits an LL PPDU to the AP through uplink.

도 16은 본 명세서에서 제안되는 장치에서 수행되는 또 다른 동작에 관련된다. 상술한 바와 같이, 도 16의 일례는 DL-TXOP 및 UL-preemption이 적용되는 상황으로 표현될 수 있다. 도 16의 일례에서는 도 15와 마찬가지로 TXOP holder (1600)에 의해 하나의 DL-TXOP(미도시)가 획득된 상황에서 적어도 하나의 small PPDU 및 LL PPDU가 교환되는 상황이다. Fig. 16 relates to another operation performed in the device proposed in the present specification. As described above, the example of Fig. 16 can be expressed as a situation in which DL-TXOP and UL-preemption are applied. In the example of Fig. 16, similar to Fig. 15, the situation is that at least one small PPDU and LL PPDU are exchanged in a situation in which one DL-TXOP (not shown) is acquired by a TXOP holder (1600).

도시된 바와 같이, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 제3의 STA(예를 들어 STA2(1602))는 PF=1인 Small PPDU(1610 및/또는 1620)를 수신할 수 있다. STA2(1602)는 예를 들어, Small PPDU(1610 및/또는 1620)에 포함된 U-SIG(및/또는 UHR-SIG)의 PF 서브필드는 기설정된 값(예를 들어 “1”)을 가질 수 있고, 도 15의 일례와 같이 해당 PF 서브필드의 값은 DL-preemption 이 허락됨을 의미할 수 있다. 이에 따라 STA2(1602)는 Small PPDU(1620)로부터 xIFS(예를 들어, SIFS)가 경과한 이후, Tx request 프레임(1640)을 송신할 수 있다. 상기 TX request 프레임(1640)은, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 제3의 STA의 LL PPDU(또는 특정 조건을 만족하거나 특정한 QoS/ AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency에 관련되는 트래픽을 전달하는 PPDU)의 송신을 요청하기 위해 사용되는 프레임으로, 다양한 방식으로 정의될 수 있고, 다양한 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다. 예를 들어 상기 TX request 프레임(1640)은 TXOP holder에게 송신될 수 있다. As illustrated, a third STA (e.g., STA2 (1602)) that is not a TXOP holder/responder can receive Small PPDUs (1610 and/or 1620) with PF=1. STA2 (1602) may, for example, have a PF subfield of U-SIG (and/or UHR-SIG) included in the Small PPDUs (1610 and/or 1620) have a preset value (e.g., “1”), and the value of the corresponding PF subfield may mean that DL-preemption is allowed, as in the example of FIG. 15. Accordingly, STA2 (1602) may transmit a Tx request frame (1640) after xIFS (e.g., SIFS) has elapsed from the Small PPDU (1620). The above TX request frame (1640) is a frame used to request transmission of an LL PPDU (or a PPDU that satisfies a specific condition or transmits traffic related to a specific QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency) of a third-party STA other than the TXOP holder/responder, and can be defined in various ways and called by various names. For example, the TX request frame (1640) can be transmitted to a TXOP holder.

상술한 바와 같이, 상기 Tx request 프레임(1640)은 전송할 Data가 있는 STA(혹은 특정 조건을 만족하는 전송할 Data)의 허락을 위해 송신될 수 있다. 예를 들어 상기 Tx request 프레임(1640)은 도 16처럼 Low latency traffic을 전송하고 싶다고 request를 TXOP holder(1600)에게 알리는 frame을 의미할 수 있다. 상술한 바와 같이 상기 Tx request 프레임(1640)은 다양한 방식으로 정의될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 Tx request 프레임(1640)은 종래의 CTS frame의 구조를 일부/전부 포함할 수 있다. 즉 상기 TX request 프레임(1640)은 종래의 RTS frame에 대응하여 송신되는 프레임으로 정의될 수 있으며, 종래의 CTS frame과 동일하게 control frame으로 정의될 수 있다. 또한, 상기 TX request 프레임(1640)은 2 옥텟의 frame control 필드와, 해당 필드에 연속하는 duration 필드(2 옥텟 길이)와, 해당 필드에 연속하는 RA(receiver address) 필드(6 옥텟 길이)를 포함할 수 있고, 상기 RA 필드는 상기 RTS frame의 TA(transmitter address) 필드의 값으로 설정될 수 있다. 추가적으로 대체적으로, 상기 Tx request 프레임(1640)은 새롭게 정의되는 frame 구조를 포함할 수 있다. 추가적으로 대체적으로, 상기 Tx request 프레임(1640)은 종래의 CTS 프레임과 동일하게 SFN(single frequency network)을 기반으로 송신될 수 있다. As described above, the Tx request frame (1640) can be transmitted for the permission of an STA having data to transmit (or data to transmit that satisfies a specific condition). For example, the Tx request frame (1640) can mean a frame that notifies the TXOP holder (1600) of a request to transmit low latency traffic, as shown in FIG. 16. As described above, the Tx request frame (1640) can be defined in various ways. For example, the Tx request frame (1640) can include part/all of the structure of a conventional CTS frame. That is, the TX request frame (1640) can be defined as a frame transmitted in response to a conventional RTS frame, and can be defined as a control frame in the same manner as a conventional CTS frame. In addition, the TX request frame (1640) may include a 2-octet frame control field, a duration field (2 octets long) continuous to the field, and a RA (receiver address) field (6 octets long) continuous to the field, and the RA field may be set to a value of a TA (transmitter address) field of the RTS frame. In addition or alternatively, the Tx request frame (1640) may include a newly defined frame structure. In addition or alternatively, the Tx request frame (1640) may be transmitted based on a SFN (single frequency network) in the same way as a conventional CTS frame.

상기 Tx request 프레임(1640)에 대응하여 TXOP 홀더(1600)는 indication을 송신할 수 있다. 상기 indication의 일례는 도 16에 도시된 polling(1650)이 가능하다. 추가적으로 대체적으로, 상기 indication의 일례는 종래 무선랜 표준의 trigger frame이 될 수 있다. 또한 상기 indication의 일례는 종래 무선랜 표준의 NFRP(NDP feedback report poll), NFR(NDP feedback report),Trigger frame의 순차적 송신을 포함할 수 있다. In response to the above Tx request frame (1640), the TXOP holder (1600) can transmit an indication. An example of the indication may be the polling (1650) illustrated in FIG. 16. Additionally, alternatively, an example of the indication may be a trigger frame of a conventional wireless LAN standard. In addition, an example of the indication may include sequential transmission of an NFRP (NDP feedback report poll), an NFR (NDP feedback report), and a Trigger frame of a conventional wireless LAN standard.

상기 TXOP 홀더(1600)로부터 상기 indication이 수신되면 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 제3의 STA(예를 들어 STA2(1602))은 LL PPDU(1660)를 송신할 수 있다. When the indication is received from the TXOP holder (1600), a third STA (e.g., STA2 (1602)) that is not the TXOP holder/responder can transmit an LL PPDU (1660).

도 15/16에 언급된 각각의 PPDU/frame 사이에는 무선랜 표준에서 정의되는 xIFS가 존재한다. 예를 들어, xIFS의 일례는 무선랜 표준에서 정의된 SIFS/PIFS일 수 있다. 각 PPDU/frame 사이의 IFS는 상황 및 PPDU 종류 등에 따라 각각 다른 값으로 설정할 수도 있다. 또한 도 15/16의 일례에서는 TXOP 홀더가 AP이지만, 상술한 바와 같이 본 명세서의 기술적 특징은 UL-TXOP에도 적용될 수 있다. Between each PPDU/frame mentioned in Fig. 15/16, there is an xIFS defined in the wireless LAN standard. For example, an example of xIFS may be SIFS/PIFS defined in the wireless LAN standard. The IFS between each PPDU/frame may be set to different values depending on the situation and PPDU type. In addition, in the example of Fig. 15/16, the TXOP holder is AP, but as described above, the technical features of this specification may also be applied to UL-TXOP.

본 명세서의 기술적 특징은 STA(예를 들어, AP 및/또는 non-AP)에서 NAV를 셋팅(또는 업데이트)하는 기법에 관련된다. 상술한 바와 같이 특정한 STA(예를 들어, TXOP 홀더/responder가 아닌 제3의 STA)은 DL-TXOP 및/또는 UL-TXOP 획득과정에서 사용되는 다양한 frame(예를 들어, intra-BSS PPDU, RTS frame, CTS frame, CTS-to-self frame/PPDU)를 수신하고, NAV(예를 들어 intra-BSS NAV)를 셋팅(또는 업데이트할 수 있다). 이러한 STA은 상기 DL-TXOP 및/또는 UL-TXOP 동안에는 상기 셋팅/업데이트된 NAV로 인하여 특정한 패킷(예를 들어, 상술한 LL-PPDU, 또는 특정 조건을 만족하거나 특정한 QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency에 관련되는 트래픽을 전달하는 PPDU)를 송신하지 못할 수 있다. 상술한 패킷을 송신하지 못하는 문제를 해결하기 위해, 상기 DL/UL-TXOP 내에서 preemption이 허용되는 경우(예를 들어, 상기 제3의 STA에 의해 상기 LL-PPDU 등이 송신될 수 있는 경우)에 STA에서 수행되는 NAV의 셋팅/업데이트 기법이 이하의 일례에서 제안된다. 또한 상술한 preemption을 허용하는 small PPDU(예를 들어, 상기 PF 서브필드가 포함되는 small PPDU)를 수신한 STA에서 수행되는 NAV의 셋팅/업데이트 기법이 이하의 일례에서 제안된다.The technical features of the present specification relate to a technique for setting (or updating) NAV in an STA (e.g., an AP and/or a non-AP). As described above, a specific STA (e.g., a third-party STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder) can receive various frames (e.g., intra-BSS PPDU, RTS frame, CTS frame, CTS-to-self frame/PPDU) used in a DL-TXOP and/or UL-TXOP acquisition process, and set (or update) NAV (e.g., intra-BSS NAV). Such STA may not transmit specific packets (e.g., LL-PPDU described above, or PPDU carrying traffic satisfying specific conditions or related to specific QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency) due to the set/updated NAV during the DL-TXOP and/or UL-TXOP. In order to solve the problem of not being able to transmit the above-described packet, a NAV setting/update technique performed in an STA when preemption is allowed within the DL/UL-TXOP (for example, when the LL-PPDU, etc. can be transmitted by the third STA) is proposed in the following example. In addition, a NAV setting/update technique performed in an STA that has received a small PPDU allowing the above-described preemption (for example, a small PPDU including the PF subfield) is proposed in the following example.

TXOP(예를 들어, UL/DL-TXOP) 내에서의 기존 동작은 다음과 같다. 즉 이하에서는 preemption이 허용되지 않는 TXOP 내에서의 STA의 동작, 및/또는 preemption을 허용하는 시그널링이 포함되지 않은 small PPDU를 수신한 STA에서의 동작이 설명된다. The existing behavior within a TXOP (e.g., UL/DL-TXOP) is as follows: i.e., the behavior of an STA within a TXOP where preemption is not allowed, and/or the behavior of an STA that receives a small PPDU that does not include signaling allowing preemption is described below.

기술적특징-1A. Technical Features-1A.

첫째로, TXOP holder의 기존동작은 다음과 같을 수 있다. First, the existing operation of the TXOP holder can be as follows.

TXOP holder는 (자신이 획득한 TXOP 내에서 contention 없이) PPDU를 전송할 수 있으며, 해당 PPDU를 통하여 TXOP의 길이(또는 듀레이션) 및 PPDU의 길이(또는 듀레이션)에 관한 정보를 indicate할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 해당 PPDU에 포함되는 L-SIG 필드의 Length 정보(예를 들어 종래의 12비트 length 정보)를 통하여 해당 PPDU의 length가 indicate될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 해당 PPDU에 포함되는 U-SIG 필드의 제어비트를 통하여 TXOP에서 남은 TXOP의 길이(또는 duration)를 rough하게 indicate할수 있다. (예를 들어 TXOP의 remaining duration이 512 μs 미만이면 remaining duration은 4 μs 단위로 indicate될 수 있고, TXOP의 remaining duration이 512 μs 이상은 remaining duration은 64 μs 단위로 indicate될 수 있음). 일례로, MAC header의 Duration field에서는 남은 TXOP duration을 μs 단위로 알려줄 수 있다.A TXOP holder can transmit a PPDU (without contention within the TXOP it has acquired), and can indicate information about the length (or duration) of the TXOP and the length (or duration) of the PPDU through the PPDU. For example, the length of the PPDU can be indicated through the Length information (e.g., conventional 12-bit length information) of the L-SIG field included in the PPDU. For example, the remaining length (or duration) of the TXOP can be roughly indicated through the control bit of the U-SIG field included in the PPDU. (For example, if the remaining duration of the TXOP is less than 512 μs, the remaining duration can be indicated in units of 4 μs, and if the remaining duration of the TXOP is 512 μs or more, the remaining duration can be indicated in units of 64 μs). For example, the Duration field of the MAC header can indicate the remaining TXOP duration in units of μs.

기술적특징-1B. Technical Features-1B.

둘째로, TXOP responder의 기존동작은 다음과 같을 수 있다. Second, the existing behavior of the TXOP responder could be as follows:

TXOP responder는 PPDU를 수신하고 decoding할 수 있으며, 자신의 STA-ID (예를 들어, EHT/UHR-SIG에 포함됨)과/혹은 Address (예를 들어, MAC header에 포함됨)가 포함되어 있으면, 자신에게 할당되는 data를 수신할 수 있다. 해당 PPDU가 끝난 후에는 다시 PPDU 수신 준비를 할 수 있다. 여기서 수신 준비라 함은 Energy detection, Preamble detection 및 decoding 등이 될 수 있다.A TXOP responder can receive and decode a PPDU, and if it contains its own STA-ID (e.g., included in EHT/UHR-SIG) and/or Address (e.g., included in MAC header), it can receive data assigned to it. After the corresponding PPDU is finished, it can prepare to receive PPDU again. Here, preparation for reception can include energy detection, preamble detection, and decoding.

기술적특징-1C. Technical features-1C.

셋째로, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 제3의 STA의 기존동작은 다음과 같을 수 있다. Third, the existing behavior of a third STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder may be as follows:

TXOP holder 및 responder가 아닌 제3의 STA(예를 들어, BSS/OBSS STA)들은 해당 TXOP만큼 NAV setting을 한다. 일례로, 해당 NAV에 해당하는 만큼의 시간 동안에는 송신이 수행되지 않고 PPDU 수신만이 수행될 수 있다. 상기 NAV는 intra-BSS NAV, 또는 basic NAV일 수 있다. Third-party STAs (e.g., BSS/OBSS STAs) that are not TXOP holders and responders set NAVs for the corresponding TXOP. For example, transmission may not be performed during the time corresponding to the corresponding NAV, and only PPDU reception may be performed. The NAV may be an intra-BSS NAV or a basic NAV.

이하에서는 preemption이 허용되는 TXOP/small PPDU에 대하여 설명된다. 이하에서는, TXOP holder, TXOP responder, 그리고 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 제3의 STA에서의 동작이 개별적으로 설명된다.Below, TXOP/small PPDU where preemption is allowed is described. Below, the operation of TXOP holder, TXOP responder, and a third STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder are described individually.

기술적특징-2A. Technical Features-2A.

이하에서는 preemption이 허용되는 TXOP 내에서(또는 preemption이 허용되는 small PPDU를 위한) TXOP holder의 기술적 특징이 설명된다. Below, the technical characteristics of a TXOP holder within a TXOP where preemption is allowed (or for a small PPDU where preemption is allowed) are described.

TXOP holder는 상술한 “기술적특징-1A”에 기재된 동작과 동일한 동작을 수행한다. 다만, Preemption이 허용된 Small PPDU가 송수신된 이후에는, TXOP holder의 PPDU를 송신할 수도 있으나, STA들로부터 상술한 Tx request frame가 수신될 수 있다는 점은 TXOP holder가 인식해야 한다. 일례로, Small PPDU로부터 SIFS 만큼이 경과한 이후에 STA들로부터 Tx request frame이 수신될 수 있음을 고려해서 수신준비를 하다가, 해당 frame이 수신되지 않으면 PIFS 만큼이 경과한 이후에 TXOP holder의 PPDU를 송신하는 것이 가능하다. The TXOP holder performs the same operation as described in the “Technical Feature-1A” described above. However, after a Small PPDU with Preemption allowed is transmitted and received, the TXOP holder’s PPDU may be transmitted, but the TXOP holder must recognize that the Tx request frame described above may be received from STAs. For example, it is possible to prepare for reception considering that a Tx request frame may be received from STAs after SIFS elapsed from the Small PPDU, and to transmit the TXOP holder’s PPDU after PIFS elapsed if the frame is not received.

기술적특징-2B.Technical Features-2B.

이하에서는 preemption이 허용되는 TXOP 내에서(또는 preemption이 허용되는 small PPDU를 위한) TXOP responder에서의 기술적 특징이 설명된다. Below, the technical features of a TXOP responder within a TXOP where preemption is allowed (or for a small PPDU where preemption is allowed) are described.

TXOP responder는 상술한 “기술적특징-1B”에 기재된 동작과 동일한 동작을 수행한다. 다만, Preemption이 허용된 Small PPDU 이후에는 다음 PPDU의 수신뿐만 아니라, TXOP responder의 PPDU의 전송을 요청하기 위해 상술한 Tx request frame을 송신할 수도 있다. 일례로, Small PPDU로부터 SIFS 만큼이 경과한 이후에 상술한 Tx request frame를 송신할 수 있고, 만약 송신할 Tx request frame이 없다면 PIFS 만큼이 경과한 이후에 PPDU를 수신을 준비할 수 있다. The TXOP responder performs the same operations as those described in the “Technical Feature-1B” described above. However, after a Small PPDU for which Preemption is allowed, the Tx request frame described above may be transmitted to request transmission of the PPDU of the TXOP responder as well as reception of the next PPDU. For example, the Tx request frame described above may be transmitted after SIFS has elapsed from the Small PPDU, and if there is no Tx request frame to be transmitted, the PPDU may be prepared for reception after PIFS has elapsed.

기술적특징-2C.Technical features-2C.

이하에서는 preemption이 허용되는 TXOP 내에서(또는 preemption이 허용되는 small PPDU를 위한) TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 제3의 STA(예를 들어, BSS STA 및/또는 OBSS STA)에서의 기술적 특징이 설명된다. Below, the technical characteristics are described for a third-party STA (e.g., BSS STA and/or OBSS STA) that is not a TXOP holder/responder within a TXOP where preemption is allowed (or for a small PPDU where preemption is allowed).

이하에서는 다양한 방식으로 STA에서 NAV를 무시하는 다수의 일례를 제안한다. Below we propose several examples of ignoring NAV in STA in various ways.

NAV를 무시하는 첫번째 일례에 따라, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA는 Preemption이 허용된 Small PPDU(예를 들어, 기설정 값을 가지는 상기 PF 서브필드가 포함된 U-SIG를 포함하는 small PPDU)를 수신한 후에 (또는 preemption이 허용되는 TXOP 내에서) NAV setting/업데이트를 수행하지 않을 수 있다. NAV setting/업데이트를 수행하지 않는 방법은 다양하게 구현될 수 있다. 예를 들어, STA 내에서 기존에 setting/업데이트된 NAV(예를 들어, intra-BSS NAV)가 존재하더라도, Preemption이 허용된 Small PPDU를 수신하면 해당 NAV를 무시할 수(또는 고려하지 않을 수) 있다. 예를 들어, NAV가 setting/업데이트되지 않는 경우, 해당 STA(즉, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA)은 NAV를 고려(consider)할 필요가 없기 때문에 해당 NAV를 무시(ignore)할 수 있다. 결과적으로 해당 STA은 NAV를 무시하고 특정한 PPDU(예를 들어, LL PPDU, LL PPDU의 송신을 위한 TX request frame, LL PPDU에 대한 ACK/BA, 특정 조건을 만족하거나 특정한 QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency에 관련되는 트래픽을 전달하는 PPDU 등)를 상기 TXOP holder가 획득한 TXOP 내에서(예를 들어 Preemption이 허용된 DL/UL TXOP 내에서) 상기 TXOP holder에게 송신할 수 있다. As a first example of ignoring NAV, a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder may not perform NAV setting/update after receiving a Small PPDU with preemption allowed (e.g., a small PPDU including a U-SIG including the PF subfield with a preset value) (or within a TXOP with preemption allowed). The methods of not performing NAV setting/update may be implemented in various ways. For example, even if there is a previously set/updated NAV (e.g., an intra-BSS NAV) within the STA, the STA may ignore (or not consider) the NAV when receiving a Small PPDU with preemption allowed. For example, if the NAV is not set/updated, the STA (i.e., a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder) may ignore the NAV because it does not need to consider the NAV. As a result, the STA can ignore the NAV and transmit specific PPDUs (e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU carrying traffic satisfying specific conditions or related to specific QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.) to the TXOP holder within the TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder (e.g., within the DL/UL TXOP where preemption is allowed).

NAV를 무시하는 두번째 일례에 따라, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA는 Small PPDU에 의해 indicate되는 duration (예를 들어 small PPDU 내의 L-SIG 필드에 포함되는 duration 정보 혹은 small PPDU 내의 A-MPDU에 의해 indicate되는 duration 정보) 동안에 NAV setting을 하다가, 해당 NAV가 끝난 후에 NAV을 release할 수 있다. 달리 표현하면, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA는 TXOP가 획득되는 과정에서 수신되는 신호(예를 들어, RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU 등)를 기반으로 NAV를 설정하는 것이 아니라, 상기 small PPDU를 기반으로 NAV를 설정할 수 있다. 구체적으로, 상기 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA는, TXOP가 획득되는 과정에서 수신되는 신호(예를 들어, RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU 등)를 기반으로 NAV가 설정되어 있더라도 해당 NAV를 무시하고, 상기 small PPDU를 기반으로 NAV를 설정할 수 있다. TXOP가 획득되는 과정에서 수신되는 신호(예를 들어, RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU 등)를 기반으로 NAV가 설정되는 경우, NAV의 duration이 매우 길어질 수 있기 때문에, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA는 오랜 기간 동안 LL PPDU 등을 송신하지 못하는 문제가 발생할 수 있다. 정리하면, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA는 Preemption이 허용된 Small PPDU(예를 들어, 기설정 값을 가지는 상기 PF 서브필드가 포함된 U-SIG를 포함하는 small PPDU)를 수신한 후에 (또는 preemption이 허용되는 TXOP 내에서) 상기 Small PPDU에 의해 indicate되는 duration(예를 들어 small PPDU 내의 L-SIG 필드에 포함되는 duration 정보 혹은 small PPDU 내의 A-MPDU에 의해 indicate되는 duration 정보)을 기반으로 NAV를 설정할 수 있다. 이 경우, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA는, TXOP가 획득되는 과정에서 수신되는 신호(예를 들어, RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU 등)를 기반으로 설정되는 NAV는 무시할 수(또는 고려하지 않을 수) 있다. As a second example of ignoring NAV, a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder can set a NAV during a duration indicated by a small PPDU (e.g., duration information included in an L-SIG field in the small PPDU or duration information indicated by an A-MPDU in the small PPDU), and release the NAV after the corresponding NAV ends. In other words, a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder can set the NAV based on the small PPDU, rather than setting the NAV based on a signal received during acquisition of the TXOP (e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.). Specifically, a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder may ignore the NAV even if the NAV is set based on a signal (e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.) received in the process of acquiring a TXOP, and may set the NAV based on the small PPDU. If the NAV is set based on a signal (e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.) received in the process of acquiring a TXOP, the duration of the NAV may become very long, and thus a problem may occur in which a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder cannot transmit LL PPDU, etc. for a long period of time. In summary, a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder may set a NAV based on the duration indicated by the Small PPDU (e.g., a small PPDU including a U-SIG including the PF subfield with a preset value) after receiving a Small PPDU for which preemption is allowed (or within a TXOP for which preemption is allowed) (e.g., a small PPDU including a U-SIG including the PF subfield with a preset value). In this case, a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder may ignore (or may not consider) the NAV set based on a signal (e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.) received during the process of acquiring a TXOP.

추가적으로 또는 대체적으로, 상술한 NAV를 무시하는 다양한 동작은 Preemption의 허용 여부를 파악할 수 없는 STA 및/또는 Small PPDU의 Type을 인식하지 못하는 STA(e.g. EHT STA 및 그 이전 version의 STA, 혹은 Preemption을 허용하지 않는 UHR STA 등)에는 적용되지 않을 수 있다. Additionally or alternatively, the various actions of ignoring the NAV described above may not be applied to STAs that cannot determine whether Preemption is allowed and/or STAs that do not recognize the Type of Small PPDU (e.g. EHT STAs and STAs of earlier versions, or UHR STAs that do not allow Preemption, etc.).

NAV를 무시하는 세번째 일례에 따라, 상술한 NAV를 무시하는 다양한 동작은 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA 중에서도 전송할 PPDU가 있는 STA에게만 적용될 수 있다. 즉 NAV를 무시하는 동작은 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA에게 모두 적용되는 것이 아닐 수 있다. 예를 들어, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA 중에서 특정 조건에 맞는 트래픽/PPDU(예를 들어, LL PPDU, LL PPDU의 송신을 위한 TX request frame, LL PPDU에 대한 ACK/BA, 특정 조건을 만족하거나 특정한 QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency에 관련되는 트래픽을 전달하는 PPDU 등)을 전송할 STA 만이 NAV를 무시할 수 있다. 보다 구체적으로, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA는 기존에 setting/update된 NAV를 무시(ignore)할지 여부를 판단할 수 있다. 즉 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA는 i) TXOP가 획득되는 과정에서 수신되는 신호(예를 들어, RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU 등)를 기반으로 NAV(예를 들어, intra-BSS NAV)를 설정할 수 있고, ii) 특정한 조건을 만족하면 해당 NAV를 무시할 수(또는 고려하지 않을 수) 있다. 상기 “특정한 조건”은 a) 해당 BSS STA이 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌지 여부; 및 b) 해당 BSS STA이 특정 조건에 맞는 트래픽/PPDU(예를 들어, LL PPDU, LL PPDU의 송신을 위한 TX request frame, LL PPDU에 대한 ACK/BA, 특정 조건을 만족하거나 특정한 QoS/AC(access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency에 관련되는 트래픽을 전달하는 PPDU 등)을 전송하는지 여부를 기초로 결정된다. 즉, 해당 BSS STA이 TXOP holder/responder가 아니면서, 해당 BSS STA이 특정 조건에 맞는 트래픽/PPDU을 전송할 때에만 해당 NAV를 무시할 수(또는 고려하지 않을 수) 있다. 이외의 경우에는 NAV가 무시되지 않을 수 있다. According to the third example of ignoring NAV, the various operations of ignoring NAV described above can be applied only to STAs that are not TXOP holder/responders but have PPDUs to transmit. In other words, the operation of ignoring NAV may not be applied to all BSS STAs that are not TXOP holder/responders. For example, among BSS STAs that are not TXOP holder/responders, only STAs that transmit traffic/PPDUs that meet specific conditions (e.g., LL PPDUs, TX request frames for transmitting LL PPDUs, ACK/BAs for LL PPDUs, PPDUs that convey traffic that meets specific conditions or is related to specific QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.) can ignore NAV. More specifically, BSS STAs that are not TXOP holder/responders can determine whether to ignore NAVs that have been previously set/updated. That is, a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder can i) set a NAV (e.g., intra-BSS NAV) based on a signal (e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.) received during the process of acquiring a TXOP, and ii) ignore (or do not consider) the NAV if a specific condition is satisfied. The “specific condition” is determined based on a) whether the BSS STA is not a TXOP holder/responder; and b) whether the BSS STA transmits traffic/PPDU satisfying a specific condition (e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU conveying traffic satisfying a specific condition or related to specific QoS/AC(access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.). That is, the NAV can be ignored (or not considered) only when the BSS STA is not a TXOP holder/responder and the BSS STA transmits traffic/PPDU that meets certain conditions. In other cases, the NAV may not be ignored.

상술한 바와 같이 NAV를 무시하는 구체적인 일례는 다양하게 구현될 수 있다. 예를 들어, NAV는 종래기법에 따라 설정(예를 들어, RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU 등을 기초로 intra-BSS NAV가 종래 기법에 따라 setting/update)되더라도, LL PPDU를 위한 상기 Tx request frame을 송신할 때에는 해당 NAV가 무시될 수 있다. 이와 같이 NAV가 setting/update되었더라도 해당 NAV를 고려하지 않고 전송하는 것은 NAV를 무시하는 것에 해당할 수 있다. As described above, specific examples of ignoring NAV can be implemented in various ways. For example, even if NAV is set according to a conventional technique (for example, intra-BSS NAV is set/updated according to a conventional technique based on RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.), the corresponding NAV can be ignored when transmitting the Tx request frame for LL PPDU. In this way, even if the NAV is set/updated, transmitting without considering the corresponding NAV can be considered ignoring the NAV.

기술적특징-2D.Technical features-2D.

추가적으로 또는 대체적으로, 상술한 바와 같이 NAV를 무시(또는 not-consider)하는 기술적 특징은 특정한 경우에만 사용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, TXOP holder가 Non-AP STA이고 TXOP responder가 AP인 경우이면서, TXOP holder/responder에 해당하지 않는 BSS STA이 전송할 PPDU가 존재하는 상황에서는 상술한 기술적 특징(즉, NAV를 무시하는 기술적 특징)이 적용되지 않을 수 있다. 즉, TXOP holder가 Non-AP STA이고 TXOP responder가 AP인 경우이면서, TXOP holder/responder에 해당하지 않는 BSS STA이 전송할 PPDU가 존재하는 상황에서는, 상술한 Tx request frame의 송신이 제한되는 것도 가능하다. 이러한 동작을 구현하기 위하여, ‘Small PPDU가 UL PPDU로 구성되는 경우(즉 small PPDU 내에 포함되는 U-SIG 필드의 1비트 서브필드인 DL/UL subfield가 ‘UL’을 가리키는 경우), 해당 U-SIG 필드에 포함되는 PF subfield 값에 상관없이 Non-AP STA들의 Tx request frame은 허용하지 않을 수 있다. Additionally or alternatively, the technical feature of ignoring (or not considering) NAV as described above may be used only in certain cases. For example, in a situation where a TXOP holder is a Non-AP STA and a TXOP responder is an AP and a BSS STA that does not correspond to the TXOP holder/responder has a PPDU to transmit, the technical feature described above (i.e., the technical feature of ignoring NAV) may not be applied. That is, in a situation where a TXOP holder is a Non-AP STA and a TXOP responder is an AP and a BSS STA that does not correspond to the TXOP holder/responder has a PPDU to transmit, it is also possible that the transmission of the Tx request frame described above may be restricted. To implement this behavior, if the Small PPDU is composed of a UL PPDU (i.e., the DL/UL subfield, which is a 1-bit subfield of the U-SIG field included in the Small PPDU, indicates ‘UL’), the Tx request frames of Non-AP STAs may not be permitted regardless of the value of the PF subfield included in the U-SIG field.

기술적특징-2E.Technical Features-2E.

상술한 “기술적특징-2C” 및 “기술적특징-2D”는 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 모든 STA에 대해 적용될 수도 있고, 또는 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA에 대해서만 적용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상술한 “기술적특징-2C” 및 “기술적특징-2D”가 OBSS STA에 대해서는 적용되지 않는 경우, OBSS STA이 Preemption이 허용된 Inter-BSS의 Small PPDU를 수신하더라도, 종래기술과 같이 basic NAV을 설정(즉 수신된 small PPDU를 기반으로 inter-BSS에 대한 NAV를 설정)하고 상술한 Tx request frame을 전송하지 않을 수 있다. 위와 같이 설정된 basic NAV는, SR(spatial reuse)가 고려되는 경우, 무시될 수 있다. The above-described “Technical Feature-2C” and “Technical Feature-2D” may be applied to all STAs that are not TXOP holder/responders, or may be applied only to BSS STAs that are not TXOP holder/responders. For example, if the above-described “Technical Feature-2C” and “Technical Feature-2D” are not applied to an OBSS STA, even if the OBSS STA receives a Small PPDU of an Inter-BSS with Preemption allowed, it may set a basic NAV as in the prior art (i.e., set a NAV for the inter-BSS based on the received small PPDU) and may not transmit the above-described Tx request frame. The basic NAV set as above may be ignored when SR (spatial reuse) is considered.

추가적으로 또는 대체적으로 OBSS STA는 TXOP holder에게 상술한 Tx request frame을 전송하지 않고, Spatial reuse 기법을 이용해서 해당 OBSS내의 STA들(AP포함)과의 송수신을 할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 해당 OBSS에서의 OBSS PD(Power Detection) level을 높여서, 해당 STA (AP포함)의 interference level이 OBSS PD level 이하면 OBSS 내에서 패킷/PPDU를 송신할 수 있다. OBSS PD level은 OBSS내에서 AP와 STA들 사이에 사전에 설정될 수 있고, BSS AP와도 사전에 공유 (negotiation 혹은 announcement) 될 수 있다. 상술한 SR 기법에 대해 추가로 설명하면 다음과 같다. 예를 들어 OBSS STA은 OBSS PD level을 기초로 주변의 무선 채널이 Busy인지 idle인지를 파악할 수 있다. 상기 SR 기법에 관련되는 OBSS PD level은 통상적인 PD level에 비해 임계값이 더 높게 설정(예를 들어 종래에 비해 10 dBm 증가된 임계값이 설정)될 수 있다. 이를 통해 상기 OBSS STA은 종래의 PD level이었다면 busy로 판단되는 무선 채널을 idle로 판단할 수 있다. 위와 같이 OBSS PD level을 적용하는 OBSS STA은 증가된 PD level의 임계 값을 기초로 설정되는 전송 전력을 기초로 OBSS 내에서 PPDU를 송신할 수 있다. 예를 들어 상술하는 SR 기법에 따르면, 상기 PD level의 임계값이 10 dBm 만큼 증가했다면, 해당 OBSS STA에게 적용되는 전송 전력의 최대 값이 10 dBm 만큼 감소할 수 있다. 이러한 방식에 따라 상기 OBSS STA은 basic NAV가 설정되는 동안(즉, BSS TXOP가 설정되는 동안)에도, OBSS 내에서 증가된 PD Level(즉 OBSS PD level) 및 감소된 전송 전력의 최대값을 기초로 PPDU를 송신할 수 있다. Additionally or alternatively, an OBSS STA may transmit and receive with STAs (including APs) within the OBSS by using the Spatial reuse technique without transmitting the aforementioned Tx request frame to the TXOP holder. For example, by increasing the OBSS PD (Power Detection) level within the OBSS, a packet/PPDU may be transmitted within the OBSS if the interference level of the STA (including AP) is lower than or equal to the OBSS PD level. The OBSS PD level may be set in advance between the AP and STAs within the OBSS, and may also be shared (negotiated or announced) in advance with the BSS AP. The SR technique described above is further described as follows. For example, an OBSS STA may determine whether a surrounding wireless channel is busy or idle based on the OBSS PD level. The OBSS PD level related to the SR technique may have a threshold set higher than a normal PD level (for example, a threshold set 10 dBm higher than the conventional one). Through this, the OBSS STA can determine a wireless channel, which is determined to be busy if it were a conventional PD level, as idle. The OBSS STA applying the OBSS PD level as described above can transmit a PPDU within the OBSS based on the transmission power set based on the threshold value of the increased PD level. For example, according to the SR technique described above, if the threshold value of the PD level increases by 10 dBm, the maximum value of the transmission power applied to the corresponding OBSS STA can be reduced by 10 dBm. In this way, the OBSS STA can transmit a PPDU based on the increased PD Level (i.e., OBSS PD level) and the maximum value of the reduced transmission power within the OBSS even while the basic NAV is being set (i.e., while the BSS TXOP is being set).

기술적특징-3. Technical features-3.

본 명세서에서 Preemption을 허용하는 방법은 다양하게 구현될 수 있다. 즉 기존에 획득된 TXOP 동안에 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 STA이, 특정 조건에 맞는 트래픽/PPDU(예를 들어, LL PPDU, LL PPDU의 송신을 위한 TX request frame, LL PPDU에 대한 ACK/BA, 특정 조건을 만족하거나 특정한 QoS/AC(access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency에 관련되는 트래픽을 전달하는 PPDU 등)을 TXOP 홀더에게 송신할 수 있는 방법은 다양하게 구현될 수 있다. 예를 들어 상술한 “기술적특징-2A” 내지 “기술적특징-2E”에 기재된 적어도 하나의 기술적 특징이 사용될 수 있다. Methods for allowing Preemption in this specification can be implemented in various ways. That is, methods for allowing an STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder to transmit traffic/PPDU satisfying specific conditions (e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU conveying traffic satisfying specific conditions or related to specific QoS/AC(access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.) to the TXOP holder during an existing acquired TXOP can be implemented in various ways. For example, at least one of the technical features described in the above-mentioned “Technical Feature-2A” to “Technical Feature-2E” can be used.

추가적으로 또는 대체적으로, 아래와 같은 방법에 따라 Preemption이 허용될 수 있다. Additionally or alternatively, Preemption may be permitted in the following manner:

예를 들어, 본 명세서의 AP/STA(예를 들어 TXOP 홀더)는, Preemption을 허용하기 위하여, TXOP을 짧게 여러 번 설정할 수 있다. 일례로, TXOP holder는 종래의 RTS frame 혹은 PPDU (e.g. Small PPDU)를 전송하면서 짧은 TXOP을 설정할 수 있다. 즉 해당 RTS frame 또는 PPDU 내에 포함되는 duration 정보의 값을 짧게 설정할 수 있다. 해당 RTS frame 또는 PPDU가 송신된 이후 xIFS(e.g., SIFS) 만큼이 경과하면, 상기 TXOP holder는 (channel access를 위한 contention을 수행할 필요 없이) 곧바로 RTS frame 또는 PPDU (e.g. Small PPDU)를 다시 송신할 수 있다. 다시 송신되는 RTS/PPDU의 duration 정보의 값은 짧게 설정된다. 상기 TXOP holder는 필요한 만큼 위의 동작을 수행하여, 연속하는 다수의 짧은 TXOP를 획득할 수 있고, 이는 결과적으로 긴 TXOP를 설정하는 것과 동일한 효과를 달성할 수 있다. 이 때 채널 점유의 길이가 지나치게 길어지는 것을 방지하기 위해, 상기 TXOP holder가 획득할 수 있는 연속하는 다수의 짧은 TXOP의 총합의 최대길이를 제한할 수 있다. 상기 다수의 짧은 TXOP의 총합의 최대길이는 기존의 하나의 TXOP의 최대길이를 기초로 설정될 수 있다. For example, the AP/STA (e.g., TXOP holder) of the present specification can set a short TXOP multiple times in order to allow preemption. For example, the TXOP holder can set a short TXOP while transmitting a conventional RTS frame or PPDU (e.g., Small PPDU). That is, the value of the duration information included in the corresponding RTS frame or PPDU can be set short. After xIFS (e.g., SIFS) has elapsed since the corresponding RTS frame or PPDU is transmitted, the TXOP holder can immediately retransmit the RTS frame or PPDU (e.g. Small PPDU) (without performing contention for channel access). The value of the duration information of the retransmitted RTS/PPDU is set short. The TXOP holder can perform the above operations as many times as necessary to obtain a number of consecutive short TXOPs, which can achieve the same effect as setting a long TXOP. At this time, in order to prevent the length of channel occupancy from becoming excessively long, the maximum length of the sum of a number of consecutive short TXOPs that the TXOP holder can acquire can be limited. The maximum length of the sum of the number of short TXOPs can be set based on the maximum length of an existing single TXOP.

예를 들어, 짧은 TXOP를 설정하는 구체적인 방법의 일례는 다음과 같다. 예를 들어 RTS frame 및 CTS frame의 교환을 기초로 TXOP을 획득/설정하는 경우, 상기 TXOP 홀더는 상기 RTS frame의 MAC header의 Duration/ID field를 ‘0’으로 설정하여 TXOP의 길이를 짧게 설정할 수 있다. 추가적으로 또는 대체적으로, 상기 TXOP 홀더는 상기 RTS frame의 MAC header의 Duration/ID field의 값을, 상기 RTS/CTS frame의 교환 이후에 송수신되는 Small PPDU를 시작 또는 끝을 기초로 설정할 수 있다. 즉, 상기 TXOP 홀더는 상기 RTS frame의 MAC header의 Duration/ID field의 값을, 상기 RTS/CTS frame의 교환 이후에 송수신되는 Small PPDU (및 상기 small PPDU에 대한 ACK/BA)까지 만을 커버하도록 짧게 설정할 수 있다. 추가적으로 또는 대체적으로, Small PPDU를 기반으로 TXOP을 획득/설정하는 경우, TXOP 홀더는 해당 PPDU를 구성하는 A-MPDU의 Duration/ID field를 ‘0’으로 설정할 수 있다. 추가적으로 또는 대체적으로, Small PPDU를 기반으로 TXOP을 획득/설정하는 경우, TXOP 홀더는 해당 PPDU를 구성하는 A-MPDU의 Duration/ID field를 해당 PPDU의 끝까지 만을 커버하도록 짧게 설정할 수 있다. For example, an example of a specific method for setting a short TXOP is as follows. For example, when acquiring/setting a TXOP based on the exchange of an RTS frame and a CTS frame, the TXOP holder can set the Duration/ID field of the MAC header of the RTS frame to ‘0’ to set the length of the TXOP short. Additionally or alternatively, the TXOP holder can set the value of the Duration/ID field of the MAC header of the RTS frame based on the start or end of the Small PPDU transmitted and received after the exchange of the RTS/CTS frames. That is, the TXOP holder can set the value of the Duration/ID field of the MAC header of the RTS frame short so as to cover only the Small PPDU (and ACK/BA for the small PPDU) transmitted and received after the exchange of the RTS/CTS frames. Additionally or alternatively, when acquiring/setting TXOP based on Small PPDU, the TXOP holder may set the Duration/ID field of A-MPDU constituting the corresponding PPDU to ‘0’. Additionally or alternatively, when acquiring/setting TXOP based on Small PPDU, the TXOP holder may set the Duration/ID field of A-MPDU constituting the corresponding PPDU to be short enough to cover only until the end of the corresponding PPDU.

위의 기법에 따라 TXOP가 상대적으로 짧게 설정된 경우, Preemption이 필요한 STA(예를 들어, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS/OBSS STA 중에서 특정한 트래픽을 송신하는 STA)들은, 짧은 TXOP이 끝난 이후에는, 스스로 설정/업데이트했던 NAV가 release해제되면서 상술한 Tx request frame를 전송할 수 있다. 즉, NAV를 무시하는 기술적 특징(예를 들어, 상술한 “기술적특징-2C” 내지 “기술적특징-2E”에서 설명된 특징)이 수행되지 않고도 상술한 Tx request frame을 적기에 송신할 수 있다. 다만 이 경우, 다른 STA들도 짧은 TXOP이 끝나고 NAV 이 해제(release)되면서 자신의 Data전송을 시도할 수 있어서, preemption 이 필요한 STA과 그렇지 않은 STA 간에 충돌이 발생할 수 있다. 이러한 충돌의 최소화하기 위한 방법의 일례로, Preemption 정보를 파악할 수 있는 STA들 중 Preemption이 필요하지 않은 STA(즉, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS/OBSS STA 중에서 LL PPDU와 같은 특정한 트래픽을 송신하지 않는 STA)들은 자신의 NAV가 해제(release)되더라도 기설정된 기간 동안에는 자신의 PPDU 전송(예를 들어 상향링크 PPDU 전송)을 시도하지 않도록 설정해줄 수 있다.According to the above technique, when the TXOP is set relatively short, the STAs that require preemption (e.g., STAs that transmit specific traffic among BSS/OBSS STAs that are not TXOP holder/responders) can transmit the above-described Tx request frame after the short TXOP ends and the NAV that they set/updated themselves is released. In other words, the above-described Tx request frame can be transmitted at the right time without performing the technical feature of ignoring the NAV (e.g., the feature described in “Technical Feature-2C” to “Technical Feature-2E” described above). However, in this case, since other STAs can also attempt to transmit their data after the short TXOP ends and the NAV is released, a collision may occur between the STAs that require preemption and those that do not. As an example of a method to minimize such collisions, among STAs that can identify preemption information, STAs that do not require preemption (i.e., STAs that are not TXOP holders/responders but are BSS/OBSS STAs that do not transmit specific traffic such as LL PPDUs) can be configured not to attempt to transmit their PPDUs (e.g., uplink PPDU transmissions) for a preset period of time even if their NAVs are released.

상술한 기술적 특징은 이하의 절차 흐름도(flowchart)를 기반으로 설명될 수 있다. The above-described technical features can be explained based on the following flowchart.

도 17은 본 명세서의 절차 흐름도의 일례이다. Figure 17 is an example of a procedure flow diagram of this specification.

도 17의 각 단계는 WLAN 시스템의 다양한 STA(AP-STA, Relay STA, non-AP STA)에 의해 수행될 수 있다. 도 17의 각 단계를 수행하는 STA은 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA(및/또는 OBSS STA)일 수 있다. 추가적으로 또는 대체적으로, 도 17의 각 단계를 수행하는 STA은 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA(및/또는 OBSS STA) 중에서, 특정 조건에 맞는 트래픽/PPDU(예를 들어, LL PPDU, LL PPDU의 송신을 위한 TX request frame, LL PPDU에 대한 ACK/BA, 특정 조건을 만족하거나 특정한 QoS/AC(access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency에 관련되는 트래픽을 전달하는 PPDU 등)을 TXOP 홀더에게 송신하는 STA일 수 있다. Each step of FIG. 17 can be performed by various STAs (AP-STA, Relay STA, non-AP STA) of the WLAN system. The STA performing each step of FIG. 17 may be a BSS STA (and/or OBSS STA) that is not a TXOP holder/responder. Additionally or alternatively, the STA performing each step of FIG. 17 may be an STA that transmits traffic/PPDU satisfying a specific condition (e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU conveying traffic satisfying a specific condition or related to a specific QoS/AC(access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.) to the TXOP holder, among the BSS STAs (and/or OBSS STAs) that are not a TXOP holder/responder.

S1710 단계에 도시된 바와 같이, STA은 NAV(network allocation vector)를 설정(setting)할 수 있다. NAV를 설정한다는 표현은 NAV를 업데이트한다는 표현으로 대체될 수 있다. STA은, TXOP 홀더가 DL/UL-TXOP를 획득하는 과정에서 송수신하는 다양한 신호(예를 들어, RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU 등)를 획득할 수 있고, 이렇게 획득된 신호를 기반으로 NAV를 설정할 수 있다. 예를 들어, S1710 단계에서 설정되는 NAV는 TXOP 홀더가 획득한 하나의 TXOP의 길이에 상응할 수 있다. As illustrated in step S1710, the STA can set a network allocation vector (NAV). The expression of setting a NAV can be replaced with the expression of updating a NAV. The STA can acquire various signals (e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.) transmitted and received during the process of acquiring a DL/UL-TXOP by the TXOP holder, and set the NAV based on the signals acquired in this way. For example, the NAV set in step S1710 can correspond to the length of one TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder.

S1710 단계에서 STA은 intra-BSS PPDU를 기반으로 NAV를 설정할 수 있다. 상기 intra-BSS PPDU는 TXOP 획득에 관련된 RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 intra-BSS PPDU는 TXOP 홀더/리스폰더에 의해 송신되는 PPDU를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 intra-BSS PPDU는 공통제어필드(예를 들어 U-SIG 필드)를 포함하고, 상기 공통제어필드는 예를 들어 6비트의 BSS color 필드를 포함할 수 있다. 상기 STA은 상기 BSS color 필드를 기초로 수신된 PPDU가 intra-BSS PPDU인지 inter-BSS PPDU인지를 식별할 수 있다. 수신된 PPDU가 intra-BSS PPDU인 경우, 상기 STA은 수신된 PPDU를 기초로 NAV(예를 들어, intra-BSS NAV)를 설정/업데이트할 수 있다. 구체적으로, 상기 STA은 수신된 intra-BSS PPDU의 공통제어필드(예를 들어 U-SIG 필드)에 포함되는 TXOP 필드(예를 들어 7비트 정보)를 기초로, 및/또는 intra-BSS PPDU 내의 MAC 헤더에 포함되는 duration/ID 정보를 기초로 상기 NAV(예를 들어, intra-BSS NAV)를 설정/업데이트할 수 있다. In step S1710, the STA can set NAV based on intra-BSS PPDU. The intra-BSS PPDU can include RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame related to TXOP acquisition. For example, the intra-BSS PPDU can include PPDU transmitted by TXOP holder/responder. For example, the intra-BSS PPDU can include common control field (e.g., U-SIG field), and the common control field can include BSS color field of, for example, 6 bits. The STA can identify whether the received PPDU is intra-BSS PPDU or inter-BSS PPDU based on the BSS color field. If the received PPDU is intra-BSS PPDU, the STA can set/update NAV (e.g., intra-BSS NAV) based on the received PPDU. Specifically, the STA may set/update the NAV (e.g., intra-BSS NAV) based on a TXOP field (e.g., 7-bit information) included in a common control field (e.g., U-SIG field) of a received intra-BSS PPDU and/or based on duration/ID information included in a MAC header within the intra-BSS PPDU.

S1720 단계에 도시된 바와 같이, STA은 설정된 NAV를 무시할지 여부를 판단한다. 예를 들어, STA은 TXOP 홀더가 획득한 하나의 TXOP 내에서 S1710 단계를 기초로 설정/업데이트된 상기 NAV를 무시할지 여부를 판단할 수 있다. 설정된 NAV를 무시(ignore)하는 동작은 다양한 방식으로 구현될 수 있다. 이에 따라 설정된 NAV를 무시한다는 표현은 다른 표현으로 대체될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 설정된 NAV를 무시하는 것은, 설정된 NAV를 고려(consider)하지 않는 것을 의미하거나, 설정된 NAV 값을 기설정된 값(예를 들어 ‘0’)으로 변경하는 것을 의미하거나, 설정된 NAV 값을 release하는 것을 의미할 수 있다. As illustrated in step S1720, the STA determines whether to ignore the set NAV. For example, the STA may determine whether to ignore the NAV set/updated based on step S1710 within one TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder. The operation of ignoring the set NAV may be implemented in various ways. Accordingly, the expression of ignoring the set NAV may be replaced with another expression. For example, ignoring the set NAV may mean not considering the set NAV, changing the set NAV value to a preset value (e.g., ‘0’), or releasing the set NAV value.

S1720 단계에서 따라 NAV를 무시할지 여부를 판단하는 단계는 상술한 "기술적특징-2C”, "기술적특징-2D”, “기술적특징-2E”의 내용에 기초할 수 있다. The step of determining whether to ignore NAV according to step S1720 may be based on the contents of “Technical Feature-2C”, “Technical Feature-2D”, and “Technical Feature-2E” described above.

예를 들어, "기술적특징-2C”에 기재된 바와 같이, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA는 Preemption이 허용된 Small PPDU(예를 들어, 기설정 값을 가지는 상기 PF 서브필드가 포함된 U-SIG를 포함하는 small PPDU)를 수신한 후에 (또는 preemption이 허용되는 TXOP 내에서) NAV setting/업데이트를 수행하지 않을 수 있다. 달리 표현하면, STA은 a) 자신이 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA인지를 판단하고, b) Preemption이 허용된 Small PPDU를 수신했는지를 판단할 수 있다. 즉 S1720 단계는 a) 자신이 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA인지를 판단하고, b) Preemption이 허용된 Small PPDU를 수신했는지를 판단하는 것을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 위에서 설명된 “a)”의 조건/판단과 “b)”의 조건/판단이 만족되지 못하는 경우, STA은 기존에 설정된 NAV를 무시할 수 없다.For example, as described in “Technical Feature-2C”, a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder may not perform NAV setting/update after receiving a Small PPDU with preemption allowed (e.g., a small PPDU including a U-SIG including the PF subfield with a preset value) (or within a TXOP with preemption allowed). In other words, the STA may a) determine whether it is a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder, and b) determine whether it has received a Small PPDU with preemption allowed. That is, step S1720 may include a) determining whether it is a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder, and b) determining whether it has received a Small PPDU with preemption allowed. For example, if the conditions/determinations of “a)” and “b)” described above are not satisfied, the STA cannot ignore the previously set NAV.

추가적으로 또는 대체적으로, “기술적특징-2C”에 기재된 바와 같이, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA는, TXOP가 획득되는 과정에서 수신되는 신호(예를 들어, RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU 등)를 기반으로 NAV가 설정되어 있더라도 해당 NAV를 무시하고, Small PPDU에 의해 indicate되는 duration (예를 들어 small PPDU 내의 L-SIG 필드에 포함되는 duration 정보 혹은 small PPDU 내의 A-MPDU에 의해 indicate되는 duration 정보)를 기초로 NAV를 설정할 수 있다. 달리 표현하면, STA은 a) 자신이 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA인지를 판단하고, b) Small PPDU 내에 NAV를 지시하는 duration (예를 들어 small PPDU 내의 L-SIG 필드에 포함되는 duration 정보 혹은 small PPDU 내의 A-MPDU에 의해 indicate되는 duration 정보)이 포함되는지를 판단할 수 있다. 즉 S1720 단계는 a) 자신이 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA인지를 판단하고, b) Preemption이 허용된 Small PPDU를 수신하였고 해당 Small PPDU 내에 NAV를 지시하는 duration이 포함되는지를 판단하는 것을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 위에서 설명된 “a)”의 조건/판단과 “b)”의 조건/판단이 만족되지 못하는 경우, STA은 기존에 설정된 NAV를 무시할 수 없다. Additionally or alternatively, as described in “Technical Feature-2C”, a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder may ignore the NAV even if the NAV is set based on a signal received during the process of acquiring a TXOP (e.g., RTS/CTS/CTS-to-self frame, intra-BSS frame/PPDU, etc.) and set the NAV based on the duration indicated by the Small PPDU (e.g., duration information included in the L-SIG field of the small PPDU or duration information indicated by the A-MPDU of the small PPDU). In other words, the STA can a) determine whether it is a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder, and b) determine whether the Small PPDU includes a duration indicating a NAV (e.g., duration information included in the L-SIG field of the small PPDU or duration information indicated by the A-MPDU of the small PPDU). That is, step S1720 may include a) determining whether it is a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder, and b) determining whether a Small PPDU with preemption allowed is received and the Small PPDU includes a duration indicating NAV. For example, if the conditions/judgments of “a)” and “b)” described above are not satisfied, the STA cannot ignore the previously set NAV.

추가적으로 또는 대체적으로, “기술적특징-2C”에 기재된 바와 같이, TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA 중에서 특정 조건에 맞는 트래픽/PPDU(예를 들어, LL PPDU, LL PPDU의 송신을 위한 TX request frame, LL PPDU에 대한 ACK/BA, 특정 조건을 만족하거나 특정한 QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency에 관련되는 트래픽을 전달하는 PPDU 등)을 전송할 STA 만이 NAV를 무시할 수 있다. 달리 표현하면, STA은 a) 자신이 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA인지를 판단하고, b) 자신이 Preemption이 허용된 Small PPDU를 수신했는지를 판단하고, c) 자신이 특정 조건에 맞는 트래픽/PPDU을 송신하는지 여부를 판단할 수 있다. 즉 S1720 단계는 a) 자신이 TXOP holder/responder가 아닌 BSS STA인지를 판단하고, b) 자신이 Preemption이 허용된 Small PPDU를 수신했는지를 판단하고, c) 자신이 특정 조건에 맞는 트래픽/PPDU을 송신하는지 여부를 판단하는 것을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 위에서 설명된 “a)”의 조건/판단, “b)”의 조건/판단, 및 “c)의 조건/판단”이 만족되지 못하는 경우, STA은 기존에 설정된 NAV를 무시할 수 없다. 상기의 모든 조건/판단이 필수적 구성요소는 아니며, 일부 조건/판단은 생략될 수 있다. 예를 들어, preemption 이 허용되는지 여부를 signaling하는 방법은 다양하게 구현될 수 있기 때문에, 상술한 “b)”의 판단/판단은 생략될 수 있다. Additionally or alternatively, as described in “Technical Feature-2C”, only a STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder and transmits traffic/PPDU that meets specific conditions (e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU that carries traffic that meets specific conditions or is related to specific QoS/AC(Access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.) may ignore NAV. In other words, a STA can a) determine whether it is a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder, b) determine whether it has received a Small PPDU with Preemption allowed, and c) determine whether it transmits traffic/PPDU that meets specific conditions. That is, step S1720 may include a) determining whether the STA is a BSS STA that is not a TXOP holder/responder, b) determining whether the STA has received a Small PPDU for which Preemption is allowed, and c) determining whether the STA transmits traffic/PPDU that meets a specific condition. For example, if the conditions/judgments of “a)”, “b)”, and “c)” described above are not satisfied, the STA cannot ignore the previously set NAV. Not all of the above conditions/judgments are essential components, and some of the conditions/judgments may be omitted. For example, since various methods of signaling whether preemption is allowed can be implemented, the judgment/judgment of “b)” described above may be omitted.

S1730 단계에 도시된 바와 같이, NAV를 무시할지 여부에 기초하여 송신 동작을 수행한다. 즉, S1720 단계에서 NAV를 무시하기로 판단한 STA은, 기존에 설정된 NAV를 무시하고 트래픽/PPDU(예를 들어, LL PPDU, LL PPDU의 송신을 위한 TX request frame, LL PPDU에 대한 ACK/BA, 특정 조건을 만족하거나 특정한 QoS/AC(access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency에 관련되는 트래픽을 전달하는 PPDU 등)을 (TXOP 홀더에게) 송신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, NAV를 무시하기로 판단한 STA은, TXOP 홀더에 의해 획득된 TXOP 동안에, 기존에 설정된 NAV를 무시하고 상술한 TX request frame을 송신하거나, LL PPDU를 송신하거나, LL PPDU에 대한 ACK/BA 등을 송신하는 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 즉 달리 표현하면, STA은, TXOP 홀더에 의해 획득된 TXOP 동안에, 기존에 설정된 NAV를 무시하고 low latency packet에 관련된 요청 신호(즉 상술한 TX request frame)를 송신할 수 있다. 상술한 TX request frame을 송신하는 단계는 필수적 단계는 아니다. 예를 들어, S1720 단계에 의해 NAV를 무시하는 것으로 판단되지 않는 경우에는 상기 TX request frame을 송신하는 단계는 생략될 수 있다. As described in step S1730, a transmission operation is performed based on whether to ignore the NAV. That is, an STA that determines to ignore the NAV in step S1720 can ignore the previously set NAV and transmit traffic/PPDU (e.g., LL PPDU, TX request frame for transmission of LL PPDU, ACK/BA for LL PPDU, PPDU conveying traffic satisfying a specific condition or related to a specific QoS/AC(access category)/TID(Traffic ID)/Delay/latency, etc.) (to the TXOP holder). For example, an STA that determines to ignore the NAV can perform an operation of ignoring the previously set NAV and transmitting the above-described TX request frame, transmitting the LL PPDU, or transmitting the ACK/BA for the LL PPDU, etc., during a TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder. In other words, during the TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder, the STA can ignore the previously set NAV and transmit a request signal related to the low latency packet (i.e., the TX request frame described above). The step of transmitting the TX request frame described above is not a mandatory step. For example, if it is not determined by step S1720 that the NAV is to be ignored, the step of transmitting the TX request frame may be omitted.

S1720 단계에서 NAV를 무시하지 않기도 판단한 STA은, 기존에 설정된 NAV에 따라 후속동작을 수행한다.(S1730) 즉, S1710 단계에서 설정된 NAV에 따라 후속동작이 수행되기 때문에, 해당 NAV가 release될때까지는 송신을 시작하지 않는다. 달리 표현하면, TXOP 홀더에 의해 획득된 TXOP 동안에 송신 동작을 수행하지 않고 수신 동작만을 수행할 수 있다. An STA that determines not to ignore the NAV at step S1720 performs subsequent operations according to the previously set NAV (S1730). That is, since subsequent operations are performed according to the NAV set at step S1710, transmission is not started until the corresponding NAV is released. In other words, during the TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder, only a reception operation can be performed without performing a transmission operation.

본 명세서의 기술적 특징(예를 들어, 도 15 내지 도 17 중 적어도 하나에 기재된 기술적 특징)은 다양한 장치에 의해 수행될 수 있다. 본 명세서의 장치는 도 1/도 14에 기재된 장치일 수 있다. 본 명세서의 장치는 적어도 하나의 프로세서; 및 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서에 동작 가능하게 연결할 수 있고(operably connectable), 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서에 의해 실행되는 것을 기반으로, 동작을 수행하는 명령어(instructions)를 저장하는 적어도 하나의 컴퓨터 메모리를 포함할 수 있다. The technical features of the present specification (for example, the technical features described in at least one of FIGS. 15 to 17) may be performed by various devices. The device of the present specification may be the device described in FIG. 1/FIG. 14. The device of the present specification may include at least one processor; and at least one computer memory operably connectable to the at least one processor, storing instructions for performing operations based on being executed by the at least one processor.

예를 들어, 상기 프로세서는, 도 1 및/또는 도 14에 기재된 프로세서일 수 있다. 즉 상술한 바와 같이, 본 명세서의 프로세서는 DSP(digital signal processor), CPU(central processing unit), GPU(graphics processing unit), 모뎀(Modem; modulator and demodulator) 중 적어도 하나를 포함할 수 있다. 상기 프로세서는 단일/다중 프로세서 아키텍처, 순차(Von Neumann)/병렬 아키텍처 등 다양한 아키텍처를 가진 컴퓨터뿐만 아니라 FPGA, ASIC, 신호 처리 장치 및 기타 장치와 같은 특수 회로(specialized circuits)도 포함한다. 예를 들어, 본 명세서의 프로세서는 Qualcomm®에 의해 제조된 SNAPDRAGON® 시리즈 프로세서, Samsung®에 의해 제조된 EXYNOS® 시리즈 프로세서, Apple®에 의해 제조된 A 시리즈 프로세서, MediaTek®에 의해 제조된 HELIO® 시리즈 프로세서, INTEL®에 의해 제조된 ATOM® 시리즈 프로세서 또는 이를 개선(enhance)한 프로세서일 수 있다. For example, the processor may be the processor described in FIG. 1 and/or FIG. 14. That is, as described above, the processor of the present specification may include at least one of a digital signal processor (DSP), a central processing unit (CPU), a graphics processing unit (GPU), and a modem (modulator and demodulator). The processor may include not only computers having various architectures such as single/multiprocessor architecture, sequential (Von Neumann)/parallel architecture, but also specialized circuits such as FPGAs, ASICs, signal processing devices, and other devices. For example, the processor of the present specification may be a SNAPDRAGON® series processor manufactured by Qualcomm®, an EXYNOS® series processor manufactured by Samsung®, an A series processor manufactured by Apple®, a HELIO® series processor manufactured by MediaTek®, an ATOM® series processor manufactured by INTEL®, or a processor that enhances these.

예를 들어, 상기 명령어(instructions)는 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서에 의해 실행(execute)되는 컴퓨터 프로그램 명령어를 의미할 수 있다. 상기 (컴퓨터 프로그램) 명령어는 본 명세서의 기술적 특징(도 15 내지 도 17 중 적어도 하나에 기재된 기술적 특징)이 상기 프로세서에 의해 수행될 수 있도록 하는 로직 및/또는 루틴을 제공한다. 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서는 상기 적어도 하나의 메모리를 판독(Read)함으로써, 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서는 컴퓨터 프로그램을 로드(load)하고 실행(execute)할 수 있다. For example, the instructions may mean computer program instructions executed by the at least one processor. The (computer program) instructions provide logic and/or routines that enable the technical features of the present specification (the technical features described in at least one of FIGS. 15 to 17) to be performed by the processor. The at least one processor can load and execute the computer program by reading the at least one memory.

상기 명령어에 의해 정의되는 컴퓨터 프로그램(들)은 적절한 전달 메커니즘(delivery mechanism)을 통해 본 명세서의 장치(예를 들어, STA)에 도착할 수 있다. 상기 전달 메커니즘은 예를 들어, 컴퓨터 판독 가능한 저장 매체, 컴퓨터 프로그램 제품, 메모리 장치, CD-ROM 또는 DVD와 같은 기록 매체, 컴퓨터 프로그램을 유형적으로 구현하는 제조물일 수 있다. 상기 전달 메커니즘은 무선 또는 전기 연결을 통해 컴퓨터 프로그램을 안정적으로 전송하도록 구성된 신호일 수 있습니다. The computer program(s) defined by the above instructions can arrive at the device (e.g., STA) of the present specification via a suitable delivery mechanism. The delivery mechanism can be, for example, a computer-readable storage medium, a computer program product, a memory device, a recording medium such as a CD-ROM or DVD, or a product tangibly embodying a computer program. The delivery mechanism can be a signal configured to reliably transmit the computer program via a wireless or electrical connection.

상기 (컴퓨터 프로그램) 명령어는 프로그래밍 가능 프로세서용 소프트웨어 또는 펌웨어(예를 들어, programmable content of a hardware device whether instructions for a processor, or configuration settings for a fixed-function device, gate array or programmable logic device 등)를 포함할 수 있다. The above (computer program) instructions may include software or firmware for a programmable processor (e.g., programmable content of a hardware device whether instructions for a processor, or configuration settings for a fixed-function device, gate array or programmable logic device, etc.).

예를 들어, 상기 메모리는 도 1 및/또는 도 14에 기재된 메모리일 수 있다. 즉 상술한 바와 같이, 본 명세서의 메모리는 본 명세서의 STA의 동작에 관련된 제어 정보나 해당 STA에서 송수신하는 신호(예를 들어, management/control/data frame가 포함되는 PPDU)에 관한 정보를 저장할 수 있다. For example, the memory may be the memory described in FIG. 1 and/or FIG. 14. That is, as described above, the memory of the present specification may store control information related to the operation of the STA of the present specification or information about a signal transmitted and received by the STA (e.g., a PPDU including a management/control/data frame).

본 명세서의 기술적 특징은 적어도 하나의 컴퓨터로 읽을 수 있는 기록매체(computer readable medium; CRM)로 구현될 수도 있다. 상기 CRM은 상술한 적어도 하나의 프로세서(processor)에 의해 실행됨을 기초로 하는 명령어(instruction)를 포함한다. 상기 CRM에 저장되는 명령어는 상술한 컴퓨터 프로그램 명령어일 수 있다. The technical features of the present specification may be implemented as at least one computer readable medium (CRM). The CRM includes instructions that are based on execution by at least one processor as described above. The instructions stored in the CRM may be the computer program instructions as described above.

본 명세서의 장치는 트랜시버를 추가로 포함할 수 있다. 상기 트랜시버는 상기 메모리/프로세서 등에 동작적으로 연결(operably connectable)될 수 있다. 상기 트랜시버는 도 1 및/또는 도 14에 도시된 트랜시버일 수 있다. The device of the present disclosure may further include a transceiver. The transceiver may be operably connectable to the memory/processor, etc. The transceiver may be the transceiver illustrated in FIG. 1 and/or FIG. 14.

상술한 본 명세서의 기술적 특징은 다양한 응용예(application)나 비즈니스 모델에 적용 가능하다. 예를 들어, 인공 지능(Artificial Intelligence: AI)을 지원하는 장치에서의 무선 통신을 위해 상술한 기술적 특징이 적용될 수 있다. The technical features of the present specification described above can be applied to various applications or business models. For example, the technical features described above can be applied to wireless communication in devices that support artificial intelligence (AI).

인공 지능은 인공적인 지능 또는 이를 만들 수 있는 방법론을 연구하는 분야를 의미하며, 머신 러닝(기계 학습, Machine Learning)은 인공 지능 분야에서 다루는 다양한 문제를 정의하고 그것을 해결하는 방법론을 연구하는 분야를 의미한다. 머신 러닝은 어떠한 작업에 대하여 꾸준한 경험을 통해 그 작업에 대한 성능을 높이는 알고리즘으로 정의하기도 한다.Artificial intelligence refers to a field that studies artificial intelligence or the methodologies for creating it, and machine learning refers to a field that defines various problems in the field of artificial intelligence and studies the methodologies for solving them. Machine learning is also defined as an algorithm that improves the performance of a task through constant experience with that task.

인공 신경망(Artificial Neural Network; ANN)은 머신 러닝에서 사용되는 모델로서, 시냅스의 결합으로 네트워크를 형성한 인공 뉴런(노드)들로 구성되는, 문제 해결 능력을 가지는 모델 전반을 의미할 수 있다. 인공 신경망은 다른 레이어의 뉴런들 사이의 연결 패턴, 모델 파라미터를 갱신하는 학습 과정, 출력값을 생성하는 활성화 함수(Activation Function)에 의해 정의될 수 있다.An artificial neural network (ANN) is a model used in machine learning, and can refer to a model with problem-solving capabilities that consists of artificial neurons (nodes) that form a network by combining synapses. An artificial neural network can be defined by the connection pattern between neurons in different layers, the learning process that updates model parameters, and the activation function that generates the output value.

인공 신경망은 입력층(Input Layer), 출력층(Output Layer), 그리고 선택적으로 하나 이상의 은닉층(Hidden Layer)를 포함할 수 있다. 각 층은 하나 이상의 뉴런을 포함하고, 인공 신경망은 뉴런과 뉴런을 연결하는 시냅스를 포함할 수 있다. 인공 신경망에서 각 뉴런은 시냅스를 통해 입력되는 입력 신호들, 가중치, 편향에 대한 활성 함수의 함숫값을 출력할 수 있다. An artificial neural network may include an input layer, an output layer, and optionally one or more hidden layers. Each layer may include one or more neurons, and the artificial neural network may include synapses connecting neurons. In an artificial neural network, each neuron may output a function value of an activation function for input signals, weights, and biases input through synapses.

모델 파라미터는 학습을 통해 결정되는 파라미터를 의미하며, 시냅스 연결의 가중치와 뉴런의 편향 등이 포함된다. 그리고, 하이퍼파라미터는 머신 러닝 알고리즘에서 학습 전에 설정되어야 하는 파라미터를 의미하며, 학습률(Learning Rate), 반복 횟수, 미니 배치 크기, 초기화 함수 등이 포함된다.Model parameters refer to parameters that are determined through learning, including the weights of synaptic connections and the biases of neurons. Hyperparameters refer to parameters that must be set before learning in machine learning algorithms, including learning rate, number of iterations, mini-batch size, and initialization functions.

인공 신경망의 학습의 목 손실 함수를 최소화하는 모델 파라미터를 결정하는 것으로 볼 수 있다. 손실 함수는 인공 신경망의 학습 과정에서 최적의 모델 파라미터를 결정하기 위한 지표로 이용될 수 있다.The goal of learning an artificial neural network can be seen as determining model parameters that minimize the loss function. The loss function can be used as an indicator for determining optimal model parameters during the learning process of an artificial neural network.

머신 러닝은 학습 방식에 따라 지도 학습(Supervised Learning), 비지도 학습(Unsupervised Learning), 강화 학습(Reinforcement Learning)으로 분류할 수 있다.Machine learning can be classified into supervised learning, unsupervised learning, and reinforcement learning depending on the learning method.

지도 학습은 학습 데이터에 대한 레이블(label)이 주어진 상태에서 인공 신경망을 학습시키는 방법을 의미하며, 레이블이란 학습 데이터가 인공 신경망에 입력되는 경우 인공 신경망이 추론해 내야 하는 정답(또는 결과 값)을 의미할 수 있다. 비지도 학습은 학습 데이터에 대한 레이블이 주어지지 않는 상태에서 인공 신경망을 학습시키는 방법을 의미할 수 있다. 강화 학습은 어떤 환경 안에서 정의된 에이전트가 각 상태에서 누적 보상을 최대화하는 행동 혹은 행동 순서를 선택하도록 학습시키는 학습 방법을 의미할 수 있다.Supervised learning refers to a method of training an artificial neural network when labels for training data are given. The labels can refer to the correct answer (or result value) that the artificial neural network should infer when training data is input to the artificial neural network. Unsupervised learning can refer to a method of training an artificial neural network when labels for training data are not given. Reinforcement learning can refer to a learning method that trains an agent defined in a certain environment to select actions or action sequences that maximize cumulative rewards in each state.

인공 신경망 중에서 복수의 은닉층을 포함하는 심층 신경망(DNN: Deep Neural Network)으로 구현되는 머신 러닝을 딥 러닝(심층 학습, Deep Learning)이라 부르기도 하며, 딥 러닝은 머신 러닝의 일부이다. 이하에서, 머신 러닝은 딥 러닝을 포함하는 의미로 사용된다.Among artificial neural networks, machine learning implemented with a deep neural network (DNN: Deep Neural Network) that includes multiple hidden layers is also called deep learning, and deep learning is a part of machine learning. Hereinafter, machine learning is used to mean including deep learning.

또한 상술한 기술적 특징은 로봇의 무선 통신에 적용될 수 있다. Additionally, the above-described technical features can be applied to wireless communication of robots.

로봇은 스스로 보유한 능력에 의해 주어진 일을 자동으로 처리하거나 작동하는 기계를 의미할 수 있다. 특히, 환경을 인식하고 스스로 판단하여 동작을 수행하는 기능을 갖는 로봇을 지능형 로봇이라 칭할 수 있다.A robot can mean a machine that automatically processes or operates a given task by its own abilities. In particular, a robot that has the ability to recognize the environment, make judgments, and perform actions on its own can be called an intelligent robot.

로봇은 사용 목적이나 분야에 따라 산업용, 의료용, 가정용, 군사용 등으로 분류할 수 있다. 로봇은 액츄에이터 또는 모터를 포함하는 구동부를 구비하여 로봇 관절을 움직이는 등의 다양한 물리적 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 또한, 이동 가능한 로봇은 구동부에 휠, 브레이크, 프로펠러 등이 포함되어, 구동부를 통해 지상에서 주행하거나 공중에서 비행할 수 있다.Robots can be classified into industrial, medical, household, and military types depending on their intended use or field. Robots can perform various physical actions, such as moving robot joints, by having a drive unit that includes an actuator or motor. In addition, mobile robots have a drive unit that includes wheels, brakes, and propellers, and can drive on the ground or fly in the air through the drive unit.

또한 상술한 기술적 특징은 확장 현실을 지원하는 장치에 적용될 수 있다. Additionally, the above-described technical features can be applied to devices supporting extended reality.

확장 현실은 가상 현실(VR: Virtual Reality), 증강 현실(AR: Augmented Reality), 혼합 현실(MR: Mixed Reality)을 총칭한다. VR 기술은 현실 세계의 객체나 배경 등을 CG 영상으로만 제공하고, AR 기술은 실제 사물 영상 위에 가상으로 만들어진 CG 영상을 함께 제공하며, MR 기술은 현실 세계에 가상 객체들을 섞고 결합시켜서 제공하는 컴퓨터 그래픽 기술이다.Extended reality is a general term for virtual reality (VR), augmented reality (AR), and mixed reality (MR). VR technology provides real-world objects and backgrounds only as CG images, AR technology provides virtual CG images on top of real-world object images, and MR technology is a computer graphics technology that mixes and combines virtual objects in the real world.

MR 기술은 현실 객체와 가상 객체를 함께 보여준다는 점에서 AR 기술과 유사하다. 그러나, AR 기술에서는 가상 객체가 현실 객체를 보완하는 형태로 사용되는 반면, MR 기술에서는 가상 객체와 현실 객체가 동등한 성격으로 사용된다는 점에서 차이점이 있다.MR technology is similar to AR technology in that it shows real objects and virtual objects together. However, there is a difference in that while AR technology uses virtual objects to complement real objects, MR technology uses virtual and real objects with equal characteristics.

XR 기술은 HMD(Head-Mount Display), HUD(Head-Up Display), 휴대폰, 태블릿 PC, 랩탑, 데스크탑, TV, 디지털 사이니지 등에 적용될 수 있고, XR 기술이 적용된 장치를 XR 장치(XR Device)라 칭할 수 있다. XR technology can be applied to HMD (Head-Mount Display), HUD (Head-Up Display), mobile phones, tablet PCs, laptops, desktops, TVs, digital signage, etc., and devices to which XR technology is applied can be called XR devices.

Claims (16)

무선 랜(Wireless Local Area Network; WLAN) 시스템에서 수행되는 방법에 있어서, In a method performed in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system, STA(station)에 의해, 인트라(intra) BSS(basic service set) PPDU(Physical Protocol Data Unit)를 기반으로 NAV(network allocation vector)를 설정하는 단계; A step of setting a network allocation vector (NAV) based on an intra BSS (basic service set) PPDU (Physical Protocol Data Unit) by a STA (station); 상기 STA이 TXOP(transmission opportunity) 홀더(holder) 및 TXOP 리스폰더(responder) 중 어느 하나인지 여부 및 상기 STA이 송신할 패킷(packet)을 기초로, 상기 STA이 상기 NAV를 고려(consider)할지 여부를 판단하되, Whether the STA is one of a TXOP (transmission opportunity) holder and a TXOP responder and whether the STA considers the NAV based on a packet to be transmitted by the STA is determined. 상기 STA이 상기 TXOP 홀더가 아니고 상기 TXOP 리스폰더가 아니면서, 송신할 패킷이 저지연 패킷(low latency packet)에 관련되는 경우, 상기 STA은 상기 NAV를 고려하지 않는, 단계; 및A step in which the STA does not consider the NAV if the packet to be transmitted is related to a low latency packet and the STA is not the TXOP holder and not the TXOP responder; and 상기 STA에 의해, 상기 패킷에 관한 요청 신호를 송신하는 단계A step of transmitting a request signal regarding the packet by the STA 를 포함하는 Including 방법method 제1항에 있어서, 상기 인트라 PPDU는 상기 STA이 속하는 BSS(Basic Service Set ) 내의 AP(access point)로부터 수신되고, 상기 NAV는 인트라-BSS NAV인,In the first paragraph, the intra PPDU is received from an AP (access point) within a BSS (Basic Service Set) to which the STA belongs, and the NAV is an intra-BSS NAV. 방법. method. 제1항에 있어서, 상기 STA은 베이직 NAV를 포함하고, 상기 베이직 NAV는 인터 BSS PPDU에 의해 설정되는In the first paragraph, the STA includes a basic NAV, and the basic NAV is set by an inter BSS PPDU. 방법. method. 제1항에 있어서, 상기 패킷에 관한 요청 신호는 상기 TXOP 홀더로 송신되는 In the first paragraph, the request signal regarding the packet is transmitted to the TXOP holder. 방법. method. 제1항에 있어서, 상기 STA은 상기 TXOP 홀더에 의해 획득된 TXOP 동안에 상기 패킷에 관한 요청신호를 송신하는In the first paragraph, the STA transmits a request signal regarding the packet during the TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder. 방법. method. 제1항에 있어서, 상기 STA은 수신된 PPDU 내의 서브필드가 기설정 값을 가지는 판단하되, 상기 서브필드는 상기 수신된 PPDU의 U-SIG 필드에 포함되는 플레그 필드이고, In the first paragraph, the STA determines that a subfield in the received PPDU has a preset value, wherein the subfield is a flag field included in the U-SIG field of the received PPDU, 상기 플레그 필드가 기설정된 값을 가지는 경우, 상기 STA은 상기 NAV를 고려하지 않는,If the above flag field has a preset value, the STA does not consider the NAV. 방법. method. 제1항에 있어서, 상기 인트라 BSS PPDU는 상기 TXOP 홀더로부터 수신된 RTS(Ready To Transmit) 프레임 또는 상기 TXOP 리스폰더로부터 수신된 CTS(Clear To Transmit) 프레임을 포함하는In the first paragraph, the intra BSS PPDU includes an RTS (Ready To Transmit) frame received from the TXOP holder or a CTS (Clear To Transmit) frame received from the TXOP responder. 방법. method. 무선 랜(Wireless Local Area Network; WLAN) 시스템의 STA(station)에 있어서, In a STA (station) of a wireless local area network (WLAN) system, 적어도 하나의 프로세서; 및at least one processor; and 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서에 동작 가능하게 연결할 수 있고(operably connectable), 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서에 의해 실행되는 것을 기반으로, 동작을 수행하는 명령어(instructions)를 저장하는 적어도 하나의 컴퓨터 메모리를 포함하되,At least one computer memory operably connectable to said at least one processor, said computer memory storing instructions for performing operations based on being executed by said at least one processor, 상기 적어도 하나의 컴퓨터 메모리의 명령어는,The instructions of at least one computer memory, 상기 STA(station)에 의해, 인트라(intra) BSS(basic service set) PPDU(Physical Protocol Data Unit)를 기반으로 NAV(network allocation vector)를 설정하는 단계; A step of setting a network allocation vector (NAV) based on an intra BSS (basic service set) PPDU (Physical Protocol Data Unit) by the above STA (station); 상기 STA이 TXOP(transmission opportunity) 홀더(holder) 및 TXOP 리스폰더(responder) 중 어느 하나인지 여부 및 상기 STA이 송신할 패킷(packet)을 기초로, 상기 STA이 상기 NAV를 고려(consider)할지 여부를 판단하되, Whether the STA is one of a TXOP (transmission opportunity) holder and a TXOP responder and whether the STA considers the NAV based on a packet to be transmitted by the STA is determined. 상기 STA이 상기 TXOP 홀더가 아니고 상기 TXOP 리스폰더가 아니면서, 송신할 패킷이 저지연 패킷(low latency packet)에 관련되는 경우, 상기 STA은 상기 NAV를 고려하지 않는, 단계; 및A step in which the STA does not consider the NAV if the packet to be transmitted is related to a low latency packet and the STA is neither the TXOP holder nor the TXOP responder; and 상기 STA에 의해, 상기 패킷에 관한 요청 신호를 송신하는 단계A step of transmitting a request signal regarding the packet by the STA 를 수행하는 To perform STA. STA. 제8항에 있어서, 상기 인트라 PPDU는 상기 STA이 속하는 BSS(Basic Service Set ) 내의 AP(access point)로부터 수신되고, 상기 NAV는 인트라-BSS NAV인,In the 8th paragraph, the intra PPDU is received from an AP (access point) within a BSS (Basic Service Set) to which the STA belongs, and the NAV is an intra-BSS NAV. STA. STA. 제8항에 있어서, 상기 STA은 베이직 NAV를 포함하고, 상기 베이직 NAV는 인터 BSS PPDU에 의해 설정되는In the 8th paragraph, the STA includes a basic NAV, and the basic NAV is set by an inter BSS PPDU. STA. STA. 제8항에 있어서, 상기 패킷에 관한 요청 신호는 상기 TXOP 홀더로 송신되는 In the 8th paragraph, the request signal regarding the packet is transmitted to the TXOP holder. STA. STA. 제8항에 있어서, 상기 STA은 상기 TXOP 홀더에 의해 획득된 TXOP 동안에 상기 패킷에 관한 요청신호를 송신하는In the 8th paragraph, the STA transmits a request signal regarding the packet during the TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder. STA. STA. 제8항에 있어서, 상기 STA은 수신된 PPDU 내의 서브필드가 기설정 값을 가지는 판단하되, 상기 서브필드는 상기 수신된 PPDU의 U-SIG 필드에 포함되는 플레그 필드이고, In the 8th paragraph, the STA determines that a subfield in the received PPDU has a preset value, wherein the subfield is a flag field included in the U-SIG field of the received PPDU, 상기 플레그 필드가 기설정된 값을 가지는 경우, 상기 STA은 상기 NAV를 고려하지 않는,If the above flag field has a preset value, the STA does not consider the NAV. STA. STA. 제8항에 있어서, 상기 인트라 BSS PPDU는 상기 TXOP 홀더로부터 수신된 RTS(Ready To Transmit) 프레임 또는 상기 TXOP 리스폰더로부터 수신된 CTS(Clear To Transmit) 프레임을 포함하는In the 8th paragraph, the intra BSS PPDU includes an RTS (Ready To Transmit) frame received from the TXOP holder or a CTS (Clear To Transmit) frame received from the TXOP responder. STA. STA. 무선 랜(Wireless Local Area Network; WLAN) 시스템에서, 적어도 하나의 프로세서(processor)에 의해 실행됨을 기초로 하는 명령어(instruction)를 포함하는 적어도 하나의 컴퓨터로 읽을 수 있는 기록매체(computer readable medium)에 있어서,In a wireless local area network (WLAN) system, at least one computer readable medium including instructions based on being executed by at least one processor, STA(station)에 의해, 인트라(intra) BSS(basic service set) PPDU(Physical Protocol Data Unit)를 기반으로 NAV(network allocation vector)를 설정하는 단계; A step of setting a network allocation vector (NAV) based on an intra BSS (basic service set) PPDU (Physical Protocol Data Unit) by a STA (station); 상기 STA이 TXOP(transmission opportunity) 홀더(holder) 및 TXOP 리스폰더(responder) 중 어느 하나인지 여부 및 상기 STA이 송신할 패킷(packet)을 기초로, 상기 STA이 상기 NAV를 고려(consider)할지 여부를 판단하되, Whether the STA is one of a TXOP (transmission opportunity) holder and a TXOP responder and whether the STA considers the NAV based on a packet to be transmitted by the STA is determined. 상기 STA이 상기 TXOP 홀더가 아니고 상기 TXOP 리스폰더가 아니면서, 송신할 패킷이 저지연 패킷(low latency packet)에 관련되는 경우, 상기 STA은 상기 NAV를 고려하지 않는, 단계; 및A step in which the STA does not consider the NAV if the packet to be transmitted is related to a low latency packet and the STA is neither the TXOP holder nor the TXOP responder; and 상기 STA에 의해, 상기 패킷에 관한 요청 신호를 송신하는 단계A step of transmitting a request signal regarding the packet by the STA 를 포함하는 동작(operation)을 수행하는, 장치. A device that performs an operation including: 무선 랜(Wireless Local Area Network; WLAN) 시스템에서, In a wireless local area network (WLAN) system, 적어도 하나의 트랜시버; At least one transceiver; 적어도 하나의 프로세서; 및at least one processor; and 상기 적어도 하나의 트랜시버 및 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서에 동작 가능하게 연결할 수 있고(operably connectable), 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서에 의해 실행되는 것을 기반으로, 동작을 수행하는 명령어(instructions)를 저장하는 적어도 하나의 컴퓨터 메모리를 포함하되,At least one computer memory operably connectable to said at least one transceiver and said at least one processor, said computer memory storing instructions for performing operations based on being executed by said at least one processor, 상기 적어도 하나의 컴퓨터 메모리의 명령어는,The instructions of at least one computer memory, STA(station)에 의해, 인트라(intra) BSS(basic service set) PPDU(Physical Protocol Data Unit)를 기반으로 NAV(network allocation vector)를 설정하는 단계; A step of setting a network allocation vector (NAV) based on an intra BSS (basic service set) PPDU (Physical Protocol Data Unit) by a STA (station); 상기 STA이 TXOP(transmission opportunity) 홀더(holder) 및 TXOP 리스폰더(responder) 중 어느 하나인지 여부 및 상기 STA이 송신할 패킷(packet)을 기초로, 상기 STA이 상기 NAV를 고려(consider)할지 여부를 판단하되, Whether the STA is one of a TXOP (transmission opportunity) holder and a TXOP responder and whether the STA considers the NAV based on a packet to be transmitted by the STA is determined. 상기 STA이 상기 TXOP 홀더가 아니고 상기 TXOP 리스폰더가 아니면서, 송신할 패킷이 저지연 패킷(low latency packet)에 관련되는 경우, 상기 STA은 상기 NAV를 고려하지 않는, 단계; 및A step in which the STA does not consider the NAV if the packet to be transmitted is related to a low latency packet and the STA is not the TXOP holder and not the TXOP responder; and 상기 STA에 의해, 상기 패킷에 관한 요청 신호를 송신하는 단계A step of transmitting a request signal regarding the packet by the STA 를 수행하는To perform 장치. Device.
PCT/KR2024/006083 2023-08-30 2024-05-07 Data transmission of station in wireless lan system Pending WO2025048116A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR20230114838 2023-08-30
KR10-2023-0114838 2023-08-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025048116A1 true WO2025048116A1 (en) 2025-03-06

Family

ID=94819650

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2024/006083 Pending WO2025048116A1 (en) 2023-08-30 2024-05-07 Data transmission of station in wireless lan system

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025048116A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20180113207A (en) * 2016-03-04 2018-10-15 주식회사 윌러스표준기술연구소 A method of wireless communication in a different basic service set and a basic service set superimposed on the wireless communication terminal
US20200154398A1 (en) * 2015-05-20 2020-05-14 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for managing nav in wireless lan system and device for same
US20200196352A1 (en) * 2015-11-04 2020-06-18 Intel IP Corporation Virtual carrier sensing with two network allocation vectors
US20200229233A1 (en) * 2016-01-13 2020-07-16 Intel IP Corporation Network allocation vector settings for multi-user operation
US20210143884A1 (en) * 2019-11-11 2021-05-13 Nxp Usa, Inc. Apparatus and methods for multi-ap joint transmission and reception

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200154398A1 (en) * 2015-05-20 2020-05-14 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for managing nav in wireless lan system and device for same
US20200196352A1 (en) * 2015-11-04 2020-06-18 Intel IP Corporation Virtual carrier sensing with two network allocation vectors
US20200229233A1 (en) * 2016-01-13 2020-07-16 Intel IP Corporation Network allocation vector settings for multi-user operation
KR20180113207A (en) * 2016-03-04 2018-10-15 주식회사 윌러스표준기술연구소 A method of wireless communication in a different basic service set and a basic service set superimposed on the wireless communication terminal
US20210143884A1 (en) * 2019-11-11 2021-05-13 Nxp Usa, Inc. Apparatus and methods for multi-ap joint transmission and reception

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022114468A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting su ppdu to peer sta in txop period allocated by trigger frame in wireless lan system
WO2022114716A1 (en) Restricted twt in obss environment
WO2022173218A1 (en) Improved operation for constrained twt
WO2021235836A1 (en) Trigger frame transmission in wireless communication system
WO2022164258A1 (en) Method for requesting information on restricted twt in wireless lan system and device using same method
WO2022108327A1 (en) Improved trigger frame
WO2021033882A1 (en) Novel access category for low latency
WO2022149935A1 (en) Enhanced indicating method for ppdu configuration and device using same method
WO2020231062A1 (en) Link maintenance in multi ap system
WO2022265387A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transferring information requested by non-ap sta for p2p transmission to ap in wireless lan system
WO2022145622A1 (en) Method and apparatus for receiving traffic for all links or specific link in wireless lan system
WO2022103169A1 (en) Limited twt operation which has been improved
WO2022270817A1 (en) Method and apparatus for changing primary link belonging to nstr link pair through ml element in wlan system
WO2022211489A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting updated information for ml reconfiguration in wireless lan system
WO2022108404A1 (en) Protection of restricted twt operation
WO2021235730A1 (en) Cts transmission method
WO2022158802A1 (en) Method and apparatus for signaling rsp on basis of twt information frame in wireless lan system
WO2022255647A1 (en) Method and device for requesting same partial information for all transmission stas within transmission mld and responding thereto in wireless lan system
WO2022203312A1 (en) Method and device for receiving, on basis of state code in wireless lan system, whether or not multi-link has been established
WO2025048116A1 (en) Data transmission of station in wireless lan system
WO2022169245A1 (en) Improved indication of trs control
WO2021225334A1 (en) Rts and cts transmission method
WO2025048117A1 (en) Physical data unit in wireless lan system
WO2022108021A1 (en) Method and apparatus for identifying change sequence information in multi-link operation in wireless lan system
WO2021010594A1 (en) Rapid data transmission in multi-ap system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24860043

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1